Manual 2012 Tucson

7/30/2019 Manual 2012 Tucson

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manual-2012-tucson 1/371

OWNER'S MANUAL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.

However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so thatour policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions andexplanations of optional as well as standard equipment.As a result, you mayfind material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.



1

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle handling instructions / 1-5

Vehicle break-in process / 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-6

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-7

Introduction



Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from your vehi-cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you

in many ways. We strongly recommendthat you read the entire manual. In orderto minimize the chance of death or injury,you must read the WARNING and CAU-TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in thismanual to best explain how to enjoy yourvehicle. By reading your manual, you willlearn about features, important safetyinformation, and driving tips under vari-ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro-vided in the Table of Contents. A goodplace to start is the index; it has an alpha-

betical listing of all information in yourmanual.

Sections:This manual has eight sectionsplus an index. Each section begins with abrief list of contents so you can tell at aglance if that section has the informationyou want.

You will find various WARNINGs,CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manu-al. These WARNINGs were prepared to

enhance your personal safety.You shouldcarefully read and follow ALL proceduresand recommendations provided in theseWARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting or help-ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGA WARNING indicates a situation inwhich harm, serious bodily injury ordeath could result if the warning isignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.



1 3

Introduction

Your new vehicle is designed to use onlyunleaded fuel having a pump octanenumber ((R+M)/2) of 87 or higher.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtainmaximum performance with UNLEADEDFUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-sions and spark plug fouling.

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and

ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),and gasoline or gasohol containingmethanol (also known as wood alcohol)are being marketed along with or insteadof leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline orgasohol containing any methanol. Eitherof these fuels may cause drivability prob-lems and damage to the fuel system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if

drivability problems occur.Vehicle damage or drivability problemsmay not be covered by the manufactur-er’s warranty if they result from the useof:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10%ethanol.

2. Gasoline or gasohol containingmethanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTIONNever add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.)

WARNING Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off whenrefueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks onetime, otherwise the Check Engine

light will illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an acci-dent.



Introduction

41

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-cent gasoline, and is manufactured

exclusively for use in Flexible FuelVehicles. “E85” is not compatible withyour vehicle. Use of “E85” may result inpoor engine performance and damage toyour vehicle's engine and fuel system.HYUNDAI recommends that customersdo not use fuel with an ethanol contentexceeding 10 percent.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your vehicle.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-formance and damage components ofthe fuel system.

Gasolines for cleaner air

To help contribute to cleaner air,HYUNDAI recommends you use gaso-

lines treated with detergent additives,which help prevent deposit formation inthe engine.These gasolines will help theengine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission ControlSystem.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle inanother country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding reg-

istration and insurance.• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-

able.

CAUTIONYour New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol.

CAUTIONNever use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs drivability.

CAUTIONYour New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance problems caused by the use of “E85”fuel.



1 5

Introduction

As with other vehicles of this type, failureto operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control, an accident orvehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (higherground clearance, track, etc.) give thisvehicle a higher center of gravity thanother types of vehicles. It is not designedfor cornering at the same speeds as aconventional 2-wheel drive sedans orsports coupe.Avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate this vehi-cle correctly may result in loss of control,

an accident or vehicle rollover. Be sureto read the “Reducing the risk of arollover” driving guidelines, in section5 of this manual.

No special break-in period is needed.By following a few simple precautionsfor the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you

may add to the performance, economyand life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.• While driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute)between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for longperiods of time, either fast or slow.Varying engine speed is needed toproperly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-

cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-erly.• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3

minutes at one time.• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200

miles (2,000 km) of operation.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESSVEHICLE HANDLINGINSTRUCTIONS



Introduction

61

This vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder (EDR). The main pur-pose of an EDR is to record, in certain

crash or near crash-like situations,such as an air bag deployment or hit-ting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehi-cle's systems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-cle is designed to record such dataas:

* How various systems in your vehiclewere operating:

* Whether or not the driver and pas-senger safety belts were buckled/ fastened;

* How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal; and,

* How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a nontrivial crash situa-tion occurs; no data are recorded bythe EDR under normal driving condi-tions and no personal data (e.g.,name, gender, age, and crash loca-tion) are recorded. However, otherparties, such as law enforcement,could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, spe-cial equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed.In addition to the vehicle manufactur-er, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if theyhave access to the vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS



1 7

Introduction

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

❈ For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.

Seat belt warning light

Tailgate open warning light

High beam indicator

Light on indicator

Turn signal indicator

Front fog light indicator*

ABS warning light

Parking brake & Brake fluidwarning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

AWD system warning light*

AWD LOCK indicator*

Malfunction indicator

Air bag warning light

Low fuel level warning light

DBC indicator*

Charging system warning light

Door ajar warning light

* : if equipped

ESC indicator*

ESC OFF indicator*

Low tire pressure telltale /TPMS malfunction indicator

ECO indicator*

Shift pattern indicator*

Manual transaxle shift indicator*

Engine coolant temperaturewarning light

Electric power steering (EPS)system warning light

Cruise indicator*

Cruise SET indicator*



F2

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limitedwarranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possiblefor an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronicsystems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you chooseto install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION



F3

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

✽ NOTICEThis indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNINGThis indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or otherpersons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTIONThis indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.



F4

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who driveHyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're veryproud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

Copyright 2011 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval

system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor America.

CAUTIONSevere engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.



F5

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts

1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai MotorCompany to manufacture vehicles.They are designed and tested for the

optimum safety, performance, and reli-ability to our customers.

2.Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-neered and built to meet rigid manu-facturing requirements. Using imita-tion, counterfeit or used salvage partsis not covered under the Hyundai NewVehicle Limited Warranty or any otherHyundai warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure ofHyundai Genuine Parts caused by theinstallation or failure of an imitation,counterfeit or used salvage part is notcovered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchas-ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported toare packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized Hyundai Dealerships.

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information,Reporting safety defects

Index

table of contents



2

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4





22

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-10

2. Power window switches ....................4-153. Central door lock switch....................4-10

4. Power window lock button ................4-18

5. Outside rearview mirror control

switch................................................4-32

6. Fuel filler door release lever .............4-21

7. Instrument panel illumination control

switch................................................4-34

8. AWD LOCK button* ..........................5-18

9. DBC button* .....................................5-3310. ESC OFF button*............................5-30

11. Fuse box .........................................7-51

12. Steering wheel................................4-28

13. Steering wheel tilt/telescope*

control .............................................4-28

14. Seat...................................................3-2

15. Hood release lever..........................4-19

16. Parking brake pedal (A/T only)*......5-25

17. Brake pedal.....................................5-24

18. Accelerator pedal..............................5-6

* : if equipped

OLM019001N



2 3


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Light control / Turn signals..................4-50

2. Steering wheel audio controls*...........4-89

3. Bluetooth phone controls* ................4-1104. Instrument cluster............... ................4-33

5. Horn....................................................4-29

6. Driver’s front air bag ...........................3-49

7. Wiper/Washer (Front and Rear)* ........4-54

8. Auto cruise controls switches*............5-36

9. Ignition switch ......................................5-5

10. Digital clock and Audio*....................4-85

11. Hazard warning flasher switch ...4-49/6-2

12. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

..........................................................3-44

13. Climate control system*............4-61/4-70

14. Seat warmer*....................................3-10

15. Cigar lighter*.....................................4-82

16. Aux, USB and iPod port* ..................4-90

17. Power outlet......................................4-84

18. Ashtray* ............................................4-82

19. Cup holder........ ................................4-83

20. Center console box...........................4-80

21. Shift lever..........................................5-10

22. Passenger’s front air bag..................3-49

23. Air vent..............................................4-64

24. Glove box..........................................4-80

* : if equippedOLM019002N




42

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-22

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-21

3. Brake/Clutch* fluid reservoir .............7-25

4. Air cleaner.........................................7-28

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-52

6. Negative battery terminal..................7-34

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-34

8. Radiator cap .....................................7-24

9. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-21

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-26

* : if equipped

OLM079001

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.



3

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-16

Child restraint system / 3-30

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-38





23

Front seat

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)*(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*

(5) Seat warmer*

(6) Headrest

Rear seat

(7) Seatback folding

(8) Headrest

(9) Armrest

*: if equipped

SEATS

OLM031001L

Manual seat

Power seat



3 3


WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust the seat

while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control,and an accident causing death,serious injury, or property dam-age.

• Do not allow anything to interferewith the normal position of theseatback. Storing items against aseatback or in any other wayinterfering with proper locking ofa seatback could result in seriousor fatal injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

• Always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap por-tion of the seat belt snug and lowacross the hips. This is the bestposition to protect you in case ofan accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessaryand perhaps severe air baginjuries, always sit as far back aspossible from the steering wheelwhile maintaining comfortablecontrol of the vehicle. We recom-mend that your chest be at least10 inches (250 mm) away fromthe steering wheel.

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly and be sure

there are no other occupantsaround the seat. If the seatback isreturned without being held andcontrolled, the back of the seatcould spring forward resulting inaccidental injury to a person struck by the seatback.

WARNING - Loose objectsLoose objects in the driver’s footarea could interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident. Do not placeanything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with the seat-back reclined could lead to seriousor fatal injury in an accident. If aseat is reclined during an accident,the occupant’s hips may slideunder the lap portion of the seatbelt applying great force to theunprotected abdomen. Serious orfatal internal injuries could result.The driver must advise the passen-ger to keep the seatback in anupright position whenever the vehi-cle is in motion.

WARNINGDo not use a sitting cushion thatreduces friction between the seatand passenger. The passenger'ships may slide under the lap por-tion of the seat belt during an acci-dent or a sudden stop. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could resultbecause the seat belt can't operatenormally.




43

(Continued)

• When resetting the seatback tothe upright position, make sure it

is securely latched by pushing itforward and rearward.

• To avoid the possibility of burns,from a hot rear floor surface donot remove the carpet in thecargo area. Emission controldevices beneath this floor gener-ate high temperatures.

WARNING - Rear seatbacks• The rear seatback must be

securely latched. If not, passen-gers and objects could be thrownforward resulting in seriousinjury or death in the event of asudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo shouldbe laid flat in the cargo area. Ifobjects are large, heavy, or mustbe piled, they must be secured.Under no circumstances shouldcargo be piled higher than theseatbacks. Failure to follow thesewarnings could result in seriousinjury or death in the event of asudden stop, collision or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in thecargo area or sit or lie on foldedseatbacks while the vehicle ismoving. All passengers must beproperly seated in seats andrestrained properly while riding.

(Continued)

WARNINGAfter adjusting the seat, alwayscheck that it is securely locked intoplace by attempting to move theseat forward or rearward withoutusing the lock release lever.Sudden or unexpected movementof the driver's seat could cause youto lose control of the vehicle result-ing in an accident.

WARNING• Use extreme caution so that

hands or other objects are notcaught in the seat mechanismswhile the seat is moving.

• Do not put a cigarette lighter onthe floor or seat. When you oper-ate the seat, gas may gush out ofthe lighter and cause fire.



3 5


Front seat adjustment - manual

Forward and rearward To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment leverunder the front edge of the seat cush-ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and rearward withoutusing the lever. If the seat moves, it is notlocked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on theseatback recline lever located on theoutside of the seat at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat andadjust the seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat cushion,push the lever that is located on the out-side of the seat cushion upwards ordownwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push thelever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the leverup several times.

OLM039004OLM039003OLM039002




63

Front seat adjustment - power(if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by using

the control knob located on the outside ofthe seat cushion. Before driving, adjustthe seat to the proper position so as toeasily control the steering wheel, pedalsand switches on the instrument panel.

Forward and rearward

Push the control knob forward or rear-ward to move the seat to the desiredposition. Release the knob once the seatreaches the desired position.

OLM039006

CAUTION• The power seat is driven by an

electric motor. Stop operating

once the adjustment is completed. Excessive operation may damage the electrical equipment.

• When in operation, the power seat consumes a large amount of electrical power. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, don’t adjust the power seat longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

• Do not operate two or more power seat control knobs at the same time. Doing so may result in power seat motor or electrical component malfunction.

WARNINGThe power seat is operable with theignition OFF.

Therefore, children should never be

left unattended in the car.



3 7


Seatback angle

Push the control knob forward or rear-ward to move the seatback to the desiredangle. Release the knob once the seatreaches the desired position.

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

Pull the control knob up to raise or downto lower the seat cushion. Release theknob once the seat reaches the desiredposition.

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)

The lumbar support can be adjusted bypressing the button.

OLM039007 OLM039008 OLM039009




83

Headrest The driver's and front passenger's seatsare equipped with a headrest for theoccupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and front passenger, butalso helps to protect the head and neckin the event of a collision.

Forward and rearward adjustment

The headrest may be adjusted forward to3 different positions by pulling the head-rest forward to the desired detent. Toadjust the headrest to it’s furthest rear-ward position, pull it fully forward to thefarthest position and release it.Adjust theheadrest so that it properly supports thehead and neck.

OLM039303N

WARNING• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrestshould be adjusted so the middleof the headrest is at the sameheight as the center of gravity ofan occupant's head. Generally,the center of gravity of most peo-ple's head is similar with theheight of the top of their eyes.Also, adjust the headrest as closeto your head as possible. For thisreason, the use of a cushion thatholds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severeinjury to the occupants mayoccur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protec-tion against neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest posi-tion of the driver's seat while thevehicle is in motion.

OLM039010



3 9


Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)while pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the head-rest poles (3) into the holes while press-ing the release button (1). Then adjust itto the appropriate height.

Active headrest

The active headrest is designed to moveforward and upward during a rear impact.This helps to prevent the driver's andfront passenger’s heads from movingbackward and thus helps minimize neckinjuries.

OLM039011 OLM039012 HNF2041-1

WARNINGMake sure the headrest locks inposition after adjusting it to proper-

ly protects the occupants.

WARNINGA gap between the seat and theheadrest release button mayappear when seating on the seat orwhen you push or pull the seat. Becareful not to get your finger, etc.caught in the gap.




103

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm thefront seats during cold weather. With theignition switch in the ON position, pusheither of the switches to warm the driver'sseat or the front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditionswhere the operation of the seat warmeris not needed, keep the switches in theOFF position.

• Each time you push the button, thetemperature setting of the seat ischanged as follows :

• The seat warmer defaults to the OFFposition whenever the ignition switch isturned on.

✽ NOTICEWith the seat warmer switch in the ONposition, the heating system in the seatturns off or on automatically depending

on the seat temperature.

CAUTION• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such as

paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place blankets,cushions or seat covers on the seats while the seat warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with

seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.

OFF→

HIGH ( )→

LOW ( ) →

OLM039013



3 11


Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on theback of the front passenger’s and driver’sseatbacks.

WARNING - Seatback pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objectsin the seatback pockets. In an acci-dent they could come loose fromthe pocket and injure vehicle occu-pants.

OLM039015

WARNINGFor proper operation of the occu-pant classification system:

• Do not place any items cumula-tively weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg)in the passenger’s seatback pocket or on the passenger’sseat.

• Do not hang onto the front pas-senger seatback.

WARNING - Seat warmerburns

Passengers should use extreme

caution when using seat warmersdue to the possibility of excessheating or burns. The occupantsmust be able to feel if the seat isbecoming too warm and to turn theseat warmer off. In particular, thedriver must exercise extreme carefor the following types of passen-gers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-abled persons, or hospital outpa-

tients2. Persons with sensitive skin or

those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medicationthat can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills, coldtablets, etc.)




123

Rear seat adjustment

Headrest The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-rests in all the seating positions for theoccupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfortfor passengers, but also helps to protectthe head and neck in the event of a colli-sion.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

WARNING• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middleof the headrest is at the sameheight as the center of gravity ofan occupant's head. Generally,the center of gravity of most peo-ple's head is similar with theheight of the top of their eyes.Also, adjust the headrest as closeto your head as possible. For thisreason, the use of a cushion thatholds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severeinjury to an occupant may occurin the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protec-tion against severe neck injurieswhen properly adjusted.

OLM039304N OLM039017

S f f f hi l



3 13


Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button(1) while pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the head-rest poles (3) into the holes while press-ing the release button (1). Then adjust itto the appropriate height.

Armrest

To use the armrest, pull it forward fromthe seatback.

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks may be folded tofacilitate carrying long items or toincrease the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

OLM039018 OLM039019

WARNINGMake sure the headrest locks inposition after adjusting it to proper-

ly protect the occupants.

WARNINGThe purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carrylonger objects that could not beaccommodated in the cargo area.

Never allow passengers to sit ontop of the folded down seatback while the car is moving as this is

not a proper seating position andno seat belts are available for use.This could result in serious injuryor death in case of an accident orsudden stop.Objects carried on thefolded down seatback should notextend higher than the top of thefront seatbacks. Doing this couldallow cargo to slide forward andcause injury or damage during sud-den stops.

S f t f t f hi l




143

To fold down the rear seatback:

1.Press the rear seat belt buckles downinto the cushion, and inserts the rearseat belt (except center seat belt) web-

bing in the guide to prevent the seatbelt from being damaged.

2.Use a key to release the rear centerseat belt from the center RH buckle.

3.Stow the center seat belt webbing inthe headliner, where the small tonguewill clip in the holder.

4. Set the front seatback to the uprightposition and if necessary, slide thefront seat forward.

5.Lower the rear headrests to the lowestposition.

6.Pull on the seatback folding lever, thenfold the seat toward the front of the

vehicle. When you return the seatbackto its upright position, always be sure ithas locked into position by pushing onthe top of the seatback.

7. To use the rear seat, lift and pull theseatback backward. Pull the seatback

firmly until it clicks into place. Makesure the seatback is locked in place.

8.Return the rear seat belt to the properposition, inserting the small tongueinto center RH buckle.

OLM039021 OLM039022




3 15


WARNINGWhen you return the rear seatback to its upright position after being

folded down:Be careful not to damage the seatbelt webbing or buckle. Do notallow the seat belt webbing orbuckle to get caught or pinched inthe rear seat. Ensure that the seat-back is completely locked into itsupright position by pushing on thetop of the seatback. Otherwise, inan accident or sudden stop, theseat could fold down and allow

cargo to enter the passenger com-partment, which could result inserious injury or death.

CAUTION - Rear seat beltsWhen returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position.Routing the seat belt

webbing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats.

CAUTION - Damaging rearseat belt buckles

When you fold the rear seatback,

push the buckle into the pocket in the rear cushion. Doing so can prevent the buckle from being damaged by the rear seatback.

WARNING - CargoCargo should always be secured toprevent it from being thrown about

the vehicle in a collision and caus-ing injury to the vehicle occupants.Do not place objects on the rearseats, since they cannot be proper-ly secured and may hit the frontseat occupants in a collision.

WARNING - Cargo loadingMake sure the engine is off, the

automatic transaxle is in P (Park) orthe manual transaxle is in R(Reverse) or 1st, and the parkingbrake is securely applied wheneverloading or unloading cargo. Failureto take these steps may allow thevehicle to move if the shift lever isinadvertently moved to anotherposition.





163

(Continued)

Care should be taken to avoid con-tamination of the webbing with pol-

ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-ticularly battery acid. Cleaning maysafely be carried out using mildsoap and water. The belt should bereplaced if webbing becomesfrayed, contaminated or damaged.It is essential to replace the entireassembly after it has been worn ina severe impact even if damage tothe assembly is not obvious. Beltsshould not be worn with strapstwisted. Each belt assembly mustonly be used by one occupant; it isdangerous to put a belt around achild being carried on the occu-pant's lap.

Seat belt restraint system

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

• For maximum restraint systemprotection, the seat belts mustalways be used whenever the caris moving.

• Seat belts are most effectivewhen seatbacks are in theupright position.

• Children age 12 and under mustalways be properly restrained inthe rear seat. Never allow chil-dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 mustbe seated in the front seat, he/shemust be properly belted and theseat should be moved as far back as possible.

• Never wear the shoulder beltunder your arm or behind yourback. An improperly positionedshoulder belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash. The shoulderbelt should be positioned midway

over your shoulder across yourcollarbone.

(Continued)

WARNINGSeat belts are designed to bearupon the bony structure of thebody, and should be worn lowacross the front of the pelvis or thepelvis, chest and shoulders, asapplicable; wearing the lap sectionof the belt across the abdominalarea must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted asfirmly as possible, consistent withcomfort, to provide the protection

for which they have been designed.A slack belt will greatly reduce theprotection afforded to the wearer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.A twisted belt can't do its job as

well. In a collision, it could evencut into you. Be sure the beltwebbing is straight and not twist-ed.

• Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. If the beltwebbing or hardware is dam-aged, replace it.




3 17


Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt

warning light will blink for approximately6 seconds each time you turn the ignitionswitch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition switch is turned on, theseat belt warning light and the seat beltwarning chime will operate for approxi-mately 6 seconds. But if it is fastenedwithin the 6 seconds, the warning lightwill blink till the 6 seconds and the warn-ing chime will turn off immediately.

If the driver's seat belt is disconnectedafter the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the seat belt warning lightwill operate for approximately 6 seconds.

But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds,the warning light will turn off immediately.If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph(10 km/h), the seat belt warning light andchime will operate for approximately 11times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and24 seconds off until the belt is fastenedor the vehicle speed decreases below 3mph (5 km/h).

WARNING• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the seatbelt adjusting devices from oper-ating to remove slack, or preventthe seat belt assembly from beingadjusted to remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, becareful not to latch the seat belt inbuckles of other seat. It's very dan-gerous and you may not be pro-tected by the seat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt and

do not fasten and unfasten theseat belt repeatedly while driving.This could result in loss of con-trol, and an accident causingdeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

• When fastening the seat belt,make sure that the seat belt doesnot pass over objects that arehard or can break easily.

• Make sure there is nothing in the

buckle. The seat belt may not befastened securely.

1GQA2083





183

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab (1) intothe buckle (2). There will be an audible"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt por-tion is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips. If you lean for-ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt willextend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lockif you try to lean forward too quickly.

✽ NOTICEIf you are not able to smoothly pullenough of the safety belt from theretractor, firmly pull the belt out and

release it. Then you will be able to pullthe belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder

belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-imum comfort and safety.

The height of the seat belt should not betoo near your neck. The shoulder portionshould be adjusted so that it lies acrossyour chest and midway over your shoul-der nearest the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat beltanchor, lower or raise the height adjusterinto an appropriate position.

B180A01NF-1 OLM039026

Front seat




3 19


To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).To lower it, push it down (3) while press-ing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the heightadjuster to make sure that it has lockedinto position.

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts areinstalled in the rear seat positions to helpaccommodate the installation of childrestraint systems. Although a combina-tion retractor is also installed in the frontpassenger seat position, it is stronglyrecommended that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER placeany infant restraint system in the frontseat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the fea-

tures of both an emergency lockingretractor seat belt and an automatic lock-ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seatbelt, pull it out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab into the buckle. There willbe an audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle. When not securing achild restraint, the seat belt operates inthe same way as the driver's seat belt(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). Itautomatically adjusts to the proper length

only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips.

B200A02NF

WARNING• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-priate height. Never position theshoulder belt across your neck orface. Improperly positioned seatbelts can cause serious injuriesin an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts afteran accident could leave you withdamaged seat belts that will notprovide protection in the event ofanother collision leading to per-sonal injury or death. Replaceyour seat belts after being in anaccident as soon as possible.

WARNINGYou should place the lap belt por-tion as low as possible and snuglyacross your hips, not on your waist.If the lap belt is located too high onyour waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of acollision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, oneshould be over and the other under,as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under thearm nearest the door.




y y

203

When the seat belt is fully extended fromthe retractor to allow the installation of achild restraint system, the seat belt oper-ation changes to allow the belt to retract,

but not to extend (Automatic LockingRetractor Type). Refer to “Using a childrestraint system” in this section.

✽ NOTICEAlthough the combination retractorprovides the same level of protection forseated passengers in either emergencyor automatic locking modes, it is recom-mended that seated passengers use theemergency locking feature for improved

convenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fullyretract.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the

release button (1) in the locking buckle.When it is released, the belt should auto-matically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt tobe sure it is not twisted, then try again.

CAUTIONDo NOT fold down the left portion of the second row seat back when the

second row center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the second row center seat belt before folding down the left portion of the second row seat back. If the second row center seat belt is buckled when the left portion of the second row seat back is folded down, distortion and damage to the top portion of the seat back and seat belt garnish may result, causing the

seat back to lock into the folded down position.

B210A01NF-1




3 21

y y

3 Point rear center belt

To fasten the rear center belt

1. Extract the tongue plate from the holeon the belt assembly cover and slowlypull the tongue plates out from theretractor.

2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into theopen end of the buckle (C) until an

audible “click" is heard, indicating thelatch is locked. Make sure the belt isnot twisted.

3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert thetongue plate (B) into the open end of

the buckle (D) until an audible “click” isheard, indicating the latch is locked.Make sure the belt is not twisted.

1KMB3441 OLM039056N 1KMB3443

CAUTION - CargoBe sure that the cargo is securely loaded in the rear cargo area. Doing not so may damage the rear center safety belt in sudden stop or certain

collisions.

CAUTIONWhen using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be used.




223

There will be an audible “click” when thetab locks in the buckle. The seat beltautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt is adjusted manu-

ally so that it fits snugly around your hips,if you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let youmove around. If there is a sudden stop orimpact, the belt will lock into position. Itwill also lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.

To unfasten the rear center belt

1.Press the release button on the buckle

(D) and remove the tongue plate (B)from the buckle (D).

2.To retract the rear center seatbelt,insert a key or similar small rigid device

into the web release hole (C). Pull upon the seat belt web (A) and allow thewebbing to retract automatically.

OLM039057N1KMB3451WARNINGWhen using the rear seat centerbelt, you must lock all tongue

plates and buckles. If any tongueplate or buckle is not locked, it willincrease the chance of injury in theevent of collision.

(C)(C)

(A)(A)




3 23

3.Insert the tongue plate (A) into the holeon the belt assembly cover.

Stowing the rear seat belt

• The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed in the pocket between the rearseatback and cushion when not in use.

• Routing the seat belt webbing throughthe rear seat belt guides will help keep

the belts from being trapped behind orunder the seats when they are foldeddown.

1KMB3453 OLM039029L OLM039031

CAUTIONWhen using the seat belt, use it after taking it out of the guides.

If you pull the seat belt when it is stored in the guides, it may damage the guides and/or belt webbing.




243

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and

front passenger's pre-tensioner seatbelts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner isto make sure that the seat belts fit tightlyagainst the occupant's body in certainfrontal or side collisions or rollovers. Thepre-tensioner seat belts may be activatedin crashes where the frontal or side colli-sion or rollover is severe enough.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or ifthe occupant tries to lean forward tooquickly, the seat belt retractor will lockinto position. In certain frontal or side col-

lisions or rollovers, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tightercontact against the occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive seat belttension on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner activates, theload limiter inside the pre-tensioner willrelease some of the pressure on theaffected seat belt.

✽ NOTICE

The pre-tensioner will activate not onlyin a frontal collision but also in a sidecollision or rollover, if the vehicle isequipped with a side or curtain air bag.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly(Driver/Passanger side, if equipped)

OED030300 1LDE3100

WARNINGFor your safety, be sure that the beltwebbing is not loose or twisted andalways sit properly on your seat.




3 25

✽ NOTICE• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may beactivated in certain frontal or side col-

lisions or rollovers.The pre-tensioners will not be activat-ed if the seat belts are not being wornat the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heardand fine dust, which may appear to besmoke, may be visible in the passengercompartment. These are normal oper-ating conditions and are not haz-ardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and shouldnot be breathed for prolonged peri-ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-oughly after an accident in which thepre-tensioner seat belts were activat-ed.

✽ NOTICEBecause the sensor that activates theSRS air bag is connected with the pre-

tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bagwarning light ( ) on the instrumentpanel will illuminate for approximately6 seconds after the ignition switch hasbeen turned to the ON position, andthen it should turn off.

WARNINGTo obtain maximum benefit from apre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn cor-rectly and adjusted to the properposition. Please read and followall of the important informationand precautions about your vehi-cle’s occupant safety features –including seat belts and air bags– that are provided in this manu-al.

2. Be sure you and your passen-gers always wear seat belts prop-

erly.

CAUTIONIf the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warning light

will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, please have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag system as soon as possible.




263

Seat belt precautions(Continued)

• Improper handling of the pre-ten-sioner seat belt assemblies, andfailure to heed the warnings not

to strike, modify, inspect, replace,service or repair the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies may lead toimproper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

• Always wear the seat belts whendriving or riding in a motor vehi-cle.

• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seatbelt must be discarded, contactan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNINGAll occupants of the vehicle mustwear their seat belts at all times.Seat belts and child restraintsreduce the risk of serious or fatalinjuries for all occupants in theevent of a collision or sudden stop.Without a seat belt, occupantscould be shifted too close to adeploying air bag, strike the interiorstructure or be thrown from thevehicle. Properly worn seat beltsgreatly reduce these hazards.

Even with advanced air bags,unbelted occupants can be severe-ly injured by a deploying air bag.

Always follow the precautionsabout seat belts, air bags and occu-pant safety contained in this manu-al.

WARNING• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-

vation, pre-tensioner seat beltsmust be replaced. All seat belts,of any type, should always bereplaced after they have beenworn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat beltassembly mechanisms becomehot during activation. Do nottouch the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies for several minutesafter they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect orreplace the pre-tensioner seatbelts yourself.This must be doneby an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies.

• Do not attempt to service orrepair the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem in any manner.

(Continued)




3 27

Infant or small child

All 50 states have child restraint laws.Youshould be aware of the specific require-ments in your state. Child and/or infant

seats must be properly placed andinstalled in the rear seat. For more infor-mation about the use of these restraints,refer to “Child restraint system” in thissection.

✽ NOTICESmall children are best protected frominjury in an accident when properlyrestrained in the rear seat by a child

restraint system that meets the require-ments of the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Before buying anychild restraint system, make sure that ithas a label certifying that it meetsFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight.Check the label on the child restraint forthis information. Refer to “Childrestraint system” in this section.

Larger children

Children who are too large for childrestraint systems should always occupythe rear seat and use the available

lap/shoulder belts.The lap portion shouldbe fastened and snugged on the hipsand as low as possible. Check if the beltfits periodically. A child's squirming couldput the belt out of position. Children aregiven the most safety in the event of anaccident when they are restrained by aproper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 12) must be seat-ed in the front seat, the child should besecurely restrained by the availablelap/shoulder belt and the seat should beplaced in the rearmost position. Childrenage 12 and under should be restrainedsecurely in the rear seat. NEVER place achild age 12 and under in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle.

WARNINGEvery person in your vehicle needsto be properly restrained at alltimes, including infants and chil-

dren. Never hold a child in yourarms or lap when riding in a vehi-cle. The violent forces created dur-ing a crash will tear the child fromyour arms and throw the childagainst the interior. Always use achild restraint appropriate for yourchild's height and weight.




283

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-es the child’s neck or face, try placing thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Ifthe shoulder belt still touches their faceor neck they need to be returned to achild restraint system.

Restraint of pregnant women

Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possibleaccording to specific recommendations

by their doctors. The lap portion of thebelt should be worn AS SNUGLY ANDLOW AS POSSIBLE on the hips, not across the abdomen.

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported.When this is necessary, you should con-sult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt.This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve max-imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-tem, all passengers should be sitting upand the front and rear seats should be inan upright position when the car is mov-ing. A seat belt cannot provide properprotection if the person is lying down in

the rear seat or if the front and rear seatsare in a reclined position.

WARNING - Shoulder beltson small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to bein contact with a child’s neck orface while the vehicle is inmotion.

• If seat belts are not properly wornand adjusted on children, there isa risk of death or serious injury.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must never placethe lap portion of the safety beltover the area of the abdomenwhere the fetus is located or abovethe abdomen where the belt couldcrush the fetus during an impact.




3 29

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat belts

and belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected peri-odically for wear or damage of any kind.Any damaged parts should be replaced

as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.If belts become dirty, they can becleaned by using a mild soap solutionand warm water. Bleach, dye, strongdetergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage andweaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts Entire in-use seat belt assembly orassemblies should be replaced if thevehicle has been involved in an accident.This should be done even if no damageis visible. Additional questions concern-ing seat belt operation should be directedto an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNINGWhen you return the rear seatback to its upright position after the rearseatback has been folded down, becareful not to damage the seat beltwebbing or buckle. Be sure that thewebbing or buckle does not get

caught or pinched in the rear seat.A seat belt with damaged webbingor buckle could possibly fail duringa collision or sudden stop, result-ing in serious injury. If the webbingor buckles are damaged, get themreplaced immediately.

WARNINGRiding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a col-lision or sudden stop. The protec-tion of your restraint system (seatbelts and air bags) is greatlyreduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snugged againstyour hips and chest to work proper-ly. The more the seatback isreclined, the greater the chance anoccupant's hips will slide under thelap belt causing serious internal

injuries. Also, the shoulder beltmay strike the occupant's neck.Drivers and passengers shouldalways sit well back in their seats,properly belted, and with the seat-backs upright.




303

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury inan accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics, children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than in thefront seat. Larger children not in a childrestraint should use one of the seat beltsprovided.

You should be aware of the specificrequirements in your state. Child and/orinfant safety seats must be properlyplaced and installed in the rear seat. Youmust use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the require-ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards (FMVSS).

Child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, orby a LATCH system.

Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured.For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car seatand seat belts, and fits your child. Followall the instructions provided by the man-ufacturer when installing the childrestraint system.

(Continued)

• When the child restraint systemis not in use, store it in the lug-gage area or fasten it with a seat

belt so that it will not be thrownforward in the case of a suddenstop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously injuredor killed by an inflating air bag.All children, even those too largefor child restraints, must ride inthe rear seat.

WARNING• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never

install a child or infant seat on thefront passenger's seat.Should anaccident occur and cause thepassenger-side air bag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in an infantor child seat. Thus only use achild restraint in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-tem can become very hot if it is

left in a closed vehicle on a sunnyday, even if the outside tempera-ture does not feel hot. Be sure tocheck the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

(Continued)




3 31

WARNINGTo reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are saferwhen restrained in the rear seat.A child riding in the front passen-ger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting inserious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the child restraintsystem manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation and use ofthe child restraint.

• Always make sure the child seat

is secured properly in the car andyour child is securely restrainedin the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms orlap when riding in a vehicle. Theviolent forces created during acrash will tear the child from yourarms and throw the child againstthe car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-self and a child. During a crash,

the belt could press deep into thechild causing serious internalinjuries.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle – not even for a shorttime. The car can heat up very

quickly, resulting in seriousinjuries to children inside. Evenvery young children may inadver-tently cause the vehicle to move,entangle themselves in the win-dows, or lock themselves or oth-ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or anytwo persons, to use the sameseat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-

sition themselves improperly.Never let a child ride with theshoulder belt under their arm orbehind their back.Always proper-ly position and secure children inthe rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up orkneel on the seat or floor of amoving vehicle. During a colli-sion or sudden stop, the childcan be violently thrown against

the vehicle’s interior, resulting inserious injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never use an infant carrier or achild safety seat that "hooks" overa seatback,it may not provide ade-

quate security in an accident.• Seat belts can become very hot,

especially when the car is parkedin direct sunlight. Always check seat belt buckles before fasten-ing them over a child.

• After an accident, have an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer check thechild restraint system, seat belt,tether anchor and lower anchor.

• If there is not enough space toplace the child restraint systembecause of the driver's seat,install the child restraint systemin the rear right seat.




323

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required.This

child seat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child and shouldbe installed in accordance with the man-ufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend thatthe child restraint system be used in therear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts movefreely under normal conditions and onlylock under extreme or emergency condi-tions (emergency locking mode), youmust manually change these seat beltsto the automatic locking mode to securea child restraint.

CRS09

OUN026150

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

WARNING - Child seatinstallation

• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the childrestraint is not properly anchoredto the car and the child is notproperly restrained in the childrestraint. Before installing thechild restraint system, read theinstructions supplied by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operateas described in this section, havethe system checked immediately

by your authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

• Failure to observe this manual'sinstructions regarding childrestraint systems and theinstructions provided with thechild restraint system couldincrease the chance and/orseverity of injury in an accident.

WARNINGNever place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passengerseat, because of the danger aninflating passenger-side air bagcould impact the rear-facing childrestraint and kill the child.




3 33

Placing a passenger seat belt into the automatic locking mode

The use of the automatic locking modewill ensure that the normal movement ofthe child in the vehicle does not causethe seat belt to be pulled out and loosenthe firmness of its hold on the childrestraint system. To secure a childrestraint system, use the following proce-dure.

To install a child restraint system on theoutboard or center rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:1. Place the child restraint system on theseat and route the lap/shoulder beltaround or through the restraint, follow-ing the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. Be sure the seat belt web-bing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch intothe buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”sound.

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seatbelt all the way out.When the shoulder

portion of the seat belt is fully extend-ed, it will shift the retractor to the“Automatic Locking” (child restraint)mode.

E2MS103005 OEN036102OEN036101




343

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion ofthe seat belt to retract and listen for an

audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.This indicates that the retractor is inthe “Automatic Locking” mode. If nodistinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the beltas possible by pushing down on the

child restraint system while feeding theshoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the seat belt isholding it firmly in place. If it is not,release the seat belt and repeat steps2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the“Automatic Locking” mode by attempt-ing to pull more of the seat belt out ofthe retractor. If you cannot, the retractor

is in the “Automatic Locking” mode.To remove the child restraint, press therelease button on the buckle and thenpull the lap/shoulder belt out of therestraint and allow the seat belt to retractfully.

When the seat belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position, theretractor will automatically switchfrom the “Automatic Locking”mode tothe emergency lock mode for normaladult usage.

OEN036104OEN036103

WARNING - Auto lock mode

The lap/shoulder belt automatically

returns to the “emergency lock mode”whenever the belt is allowedto retract fully. Therefore, the pre-ceding seven steps must be fol-lowed each time a child restraint isinstalled.

If the retractor is not in theAutomatic Locking mode, the childrestraint can move when your vehi-cle turns or stops suddenly. A childcan be seriously injured or killed if

the child restraint is not properlyanchored to the car, including set-ting the retractor to the AutomaticLocking mode.




3 35

Securing a child restraint seat with tether anchor system

Child restraint hook holders are locatedon the back of the rear seatbacks.

1. Route the child restraint seat tetherstrap over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable head-rests, route the tether strap under theheadrest and between the headrestposts, otherwise route the tether strapover the top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to theappropriate child restraint hook holderand tighten to secure the child restraintseat.

OLM039033NWARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether anchor

or to a single lower anchoragepoint. The increased load causedby multiple seats may cause thetethers or lower anchorage pointsto break, causing serious injury ordeath.

WARNINGA child can be seriously injured orkilled in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchoredto the car and the child is not prop-erly restrained in the child restraint.Always follow the child seat manu-facturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

OLM039034




363

Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturers makechild restraint seats that are labeled asLATCH or LATCH-compatible childrestraint seats. LATCH stands for "LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children". Theseseats include two rigid or webbingmounted attachments that connect totwo LATCH anchors at specific seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofchild restraint seat eliminates the need touse seat belts to attach the child seat in

the rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located onthe left and right rear seat backs to indi-

cate the position of the lower anchors forchild restraints.

WARNING - Child restraintcheck

Check that the child restraint sys-

tem is secure by pushing andpulling it in different directions.Incorrectly fitted child restraintsmay swing, twist, tip or separatecausing death or serious injury.

WARNING - Child restraintanchorage

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses orfor attaching other items orequipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhereother than the correct tetheranchor.

OLM039035 OLM039036N

Lower Anchor

Lower AnchorPosition Indicator




3 37

LATCH anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The LATCH anchors are

located in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is noLATCH anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located betweenthe seatback and the seat cushion of therear seat left and right outboard seatingpositions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install child

restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH childrestraint, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the LATCH and tetheranchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seat fromside to side. Also try to tug the seat for-ward. Check to see if the anchors holdthe seat in place.

OLM039053N

WARNINGIf the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child beingseriously injured or killed in a colli-sion greatly increases.

WARNING - LATCH loweranchors

LATCH lower anchors are only tobe used with the left and right rearoutboard seating positions. Never

attempt to attach a LATCHequipped seat in the center seatingposition. You may damage theanchors or the anchors may failand break in a collision.

WARNING• When using the vehicle's

"LATCH" system to install a childrestraint system in the rear seat,all unused vehicle rear seat beltmetal latch plates or tabs must belatched securely in their seat beltbuckles and the seat belt web-bing must be retracted behindthe child restraint to prevent thechild from reaching and takinghold of unretracted seat belts.Unlatched metal latch plates ortabs may allow the child to reachthe unretracted seat belts whichmay result in strangulation and aserious injury or death to thechild in the child restraint.

• Do not place anything around thelower anchors. Also make surethat the seat belt is not caught inthe lower anchors.

WARNING

Install the child restraint seat fullyrearward against the seatback withthe seatback reclined two positionsfrom the most upright latched posi-tion.

CAUTIONDo not allow the rear seat belt webbing to get scratched or pinched by the child-seat latch and LATCH anchor during the installation.


AIR BAG ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM



383

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side impact air bag

(4) Curtain air bag

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

OLM032301N

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

WARNINGEven in vehicles with air bags, youand your passengers must alwayswear the seat belts provided inorder to minimize the risk andseverity of injury in the event of acollision or rollover.




3 39

How does the air bag systemoperate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate ifnecessary) only when the ignition switchis turned to the ON or START position.

• The appropriate air bags inflateinstantly in the event of a seriousfrontal collision or side collision inorder to help protect the occupantsfrom serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which theair bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed toinflate based upon the severity of a col-lision and its direction. These two fac-tors determine whether the sensorsproduce an electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and the densi-ty and stiffness of the vehicles orobjects which your vehicle hits in thecollision. The determining factors arenot limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely inflateand deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to seethe air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will sim-ply see the deflated air bags hangingout of their storage compartments afterthe collision.

• In addition to inflating in serious sidecollisions, side and/or curtain airbagswill inflate if the sensing system detectsa rollover.

• When a rollover is detected, side and/orcurtain airbags will remain inflatedlonger to help provide protection fromejection, especially when used in con- junction with the seat belts.

• In order to help provide protection, theair bags must inflate rapidly. The speedof the air bag inflation is a consequenceof extremely short time in which toinflate the air bag between the occupantand the vehicle structures before theoccupant impacts those structures.This

speed of inflation reduces the risk ofserious or life-threatening injuries and isthus a necessary part of the air bagdesign. However, air bag inflation canalso cause injuries which can includefacial abrasions, bruises and brokenbones because the inflation speed alsocauses the air bags to expand with agreat deal of force.

• There are even circumstances underwhich contact with the air bag can

cause fatal injuries, especially if theoccupant is positioned excessivelyclose to the air bag.

WARNING• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying airbags in a collision, the drivershould sit as far back from thesteering wheel air bag as possi-ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm)away). The front passengersshould always move their seatsas far back as possible and sitback in their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in theevent of collision, and passen-gers may be injured by the air bagexpansion force if they are not inproper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries including facial or bodilyabrasions, injuries from brokenglasses or burns.




403

Noise and smoke When the air bags inflate, they make aloud noise and they leave smoke andpowder in the air inside of the vehicle.This is normal and is a result of the igni-

tion of the air bag inflator. After the airbag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-comfort in breathing due to the contact ofyour chest with both the seat belt and theair bag, as well as from breathing thesmoke and powder. Open your doorsand/or windows as soon as possibleafter impact in order to reduce dis-comfort and prevent prolonged expo-sure to the smoke and powder.Though the smoke and powder are non-

toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is thecase, wash and rinse with cold waterimmediately and consult a doctor if thesymptom persists.

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger’s seat.

Never place a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger’s seat. If the airbag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-ing child restraint, causing serious orfatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing childrestraints in the front passenger’s seateither. If the front passenger air baginflates, it could cause serious or fatalinjuries to the child.

1JBH3051

WARNINGWhen the air bags deploy, the airbag related parts in the steeringwheel and/or instrument paneland/or in both sides of the roof rails

above the front and rear doors andin the front seatbacks are very hot.To prevent injury, do not touch theair bag storage area’s internal com-ponents immediately after an airbag has inflated.

WARNING• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint ona seat protected by an air bag infront of it!

• Never put a child restraint in thefront passenger’s seat. If the frontpassenger air bag inflates, it cancause serious or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats of a vehicleequipped with side and/or curtainair bags, be sure to install thechild restraint system as far awayfrom the door side as possible,and securely lock the childrestraint system in position.

Inflation of side and/or curtain airbags could cause serious injuryor death to an infant or child.




3 41


The purpose of the air bag warning light in

your instrument panel is to alert you of apotential problem with your airbag system,which could include your side and/or cur-tain airbags used for rollover protection.

When the ignition switch is turned ON,the warning light should illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly whenyou turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating forapproximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle isin motion.

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following com-

ponents:1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side impact air bag modules

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/ Rollover sensor

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors10. “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator (Front passenger’s seat only)

11. Occupant classification system(Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt buckle sensors

13. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly(Driver/Passanger side, if equipped)

The SRSCM continually monitors all SRScomponents while the ignition switch is ONto determine if a crash impact is severeenough to require air bag deployment orpre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

If the airbag warning light remains illumi-nated for more than 6 seconds after theignition is turned on, or if it illuminates

during vehicle operation, an SRS compo-nent may not be functioning properly andyou should have your vehicle checked byan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction in the airbagsystem. Have an authorized HYUNDAIdealer inspect the air bag system assoon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle isin motion.

OLM039302NW7-147

,

,




423

The front air bag modules are locatedboth in the center of the steering wheeland in the front passenger's panel abovethe glove box. When the SRSCM detectsa sufficiently severe impact to the front ofthe vehicle, it will automatically deploythe front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theair bags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combinationwith a properly worn seat belt, slows thedriver's or the passenger's forwardmotion, reducing the risk of head andchest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bagimmediately starts deflating, enabling thedriver to maintain forward visibility andthe ability to steer or operate other con-trols.

B240B01L

Driver’s front air bag (1)

B240B02L B240B03L

Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)




3 43

WARNING

• Do not install or place any acces-sories (drink holder, cassetteholder, sticker, etc.) on the frontpassenger's panel above theglove box in a vehicle with a pas-senger's air bag. Such objectsmay become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the pas-senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-uid air freshener inside the vehi-

cle, do not place it near theinstrument cluster nor on theinstrument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous pro-jectile and cause injury if the pas-senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a finedust released in the vehicle.These conditions are normal andare not hazardous - the air bagsare packed in this fine powder.The dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skinor eye irritation as well as aggra-vate asthma for some persons.Always wash all exposed skinareas thoroughly with lukewarmwater and a mild soap after anaccident in which the air bags

were deployed.• The SRS can function only when

the ignition switch is in the ONposition. If the SRS air bag warn-ing light does not illuminate, con-tinuously remains on after illumi-nating for about 6 seconds whenthe ignition switch is turned tothe ON position, or after theengine is started, or comes onwhile driving, the SRS is not

working properly. If this occurs,have your vehicle immediatelyinspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-connect a battery terminal, turnthe ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the ignitionkey. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when theignition switch is in the ON posi-tion. Failure to heed this warningwill cause the SRS air bag warn-ing light to illuminate.




443

Occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-

pant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat.

The occupant classification system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated front passenger anddetermine if the passenger's front air bagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.The driver's front air bag is not affectedor controlled by the occupant classifica-tion system.

Main components of occupantclassification system

• A detection device located within thefront passenger seat cushion.

• Electronic system to determinewhether the passenger air bag sys-tems should be activated or deactivat-ed.

• A indicator light located on the instru-ment panel which illuminates thewords "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicating the front passenger air bagsystem is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag indicatorlight is interconnected with the occu-

pant classification system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied bya person that the system determines tobe of adult size, and he/she sits properly(sitting upright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on the seat

cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and their feet on thefloor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will turn off and the front pas-senger's air bag will be able to inflate, ifnecessary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator on the center facia panel.This system detects the conditions 1~4in the following table and activates ordeactivates the front passenger air bag

based on these conditions.

OLM039052N




3 45

Always be sure that you and all vehicleoccupants are seated and restrainedproperly (sitting upright with the seat inan upright position, centered on the seatcushion, with the person's legs comfort-

ably extended, feet on the floor, andwearing the seat belt properly) for themost effective protection by the air bagand the seat belt.

• The OCS may not function properly ifthe passenger takes actions which canaffect the detection system. Theseinclude:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.

(2) Leaning against the door or centerconsole.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or thefront of the seat.

(4) Putting legs on the dashboard orresting them on other locationswhich reduce the passenger weighton the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position orplacing weight or an active elec-tronic device (ex. Laptop computer,navigation etc..) on the front pas-senger's seat when it is unoccu-pied by a passenger adverselyaffects the occupant classificationsystem (OCS).

(Continued)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected by the

occupant classification system

Indicator/Warning light Devices

PASSENGER

AIR BAG “OFF”

indicator light

SRS

warning light

Front passenger

air bag

1. Adult *1 Off Off Activated

2. Infant*2 or child restraint system

with 12 months old*3On Off Deactivated

3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated

*1 The system judges a person of adultsize as an adult. When a smaller adult

sits in the front passenger seat, thesystem may recognize him/her as achild depending on his/her physiqueand posture.

*2 Do not allow children to ride in thefront passenger seat. When a largerchild who has outgrown a childrestraint system sits in the front pas-senger seat, the system may recog-nize him/her as an adult dependingupon his/her physique or sitting posi-

tion.*3 Never install a child restraint system

on the front passenger seat.




463

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or centerconsole.

- Never sit on one side of the frontpassenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-board.

B990A08O

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load or anactive electronic device (ex.Laptop computer, navigation

etc..) on the front passenger seat.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front pas-senger seatback.

(Continued)




3 47

When an adult is seated in the front pas-senger seat, if the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator is on, turn the igni-

tion switch to the LOCK position and askthe passenger to sit properly (sittingupright with the seat back in an uprightposition, centered on the seat cushionwith their seat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on the floor).Restart the engine and have the personremain in that position. This will allow thesystem to detect the person and toenable the passenger air bag.

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is still on, ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat.

✽ NOTICEThe "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turnedto the ON position or after the engine isstarted. If the front passenger seat isoccupied, the occupant classificationsensor will then classify the front pas-senger after several more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNINGDo not allow an adult passenger toride in the front seat when the“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-cator is illuminated because the airbag will not deploy in the event of acrash. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator remains illuminatedafter the adult passenger reposi-tions themselves properly and thecar is restarted, it is recommended

that passenger move to the rearseat because the passenger's frontair bag will not deploy.

Front seat passengers must stayproperly seated to avoid seriousinjury from a deploying air bag.

WARNINGDo not put a heavy load or an activeelectronic device (ex. Laptop com-puter, navigation etc..) on the frontpassenger seat. Do not place anyitems under the front passengerseat. Any of these could interferewith proper sensor operation.

Proper position




483

(Continued)

• Accident statistics show that chil-dren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear, as opposed

to the front seat. It is recommend-ed that child restraints be securedin a rear seat, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat,a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat and an older child rid-ing in a booster seat.

• Air bags can only be used once –have an authorized HYUNDAIdealer replace the air bag imme-diately after deployment.

• The occupant classification sys-tem may not work properly ifwater, coffee or any other liquidincluding rain gets on the seat.Keep the front seat dry at alltimes.

• Do not place an electronic devicesuch as a laptop computer on thefront passenger seat. Its elec-tronic field may cause the OCS toswitch to the "on" condition and

thus allow the passenger air bagto deploy needlessly in a colli-sion, increasing your repaircosts.

(Continued)

• If the front passenger seat isoccupied by a child who is not ina CRS, the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator may or maynot be on and the passenger airbag may or may not deploy in acollision. Have the child move to arear seat to increase their safety.

• Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place any-thing on or attach anything suchas a blanket or seat heater to thefront passenger seat. This canadversely affect the occupant

classification system.• Do not place sharp objects on thefront passenger seat. These maydamage the occupant classifica-tion system, if they puncture theseat cushion.

• Do not use accessory seat cov-ers on the front seats.

(Continued)

WARNING• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant clas-sification system, never install a

child restraint system in the frontpassenger's seat. A deploying airbag can forcefully strike a childresulting in serious injuries ordeath. Any child age 12 andunder should ride in the rear seat.Children too large for childrestraints should use the avail-able lap/shoulder belts. No mat-ter what type of crash, children ofall ages are safer when restrained

in the rear seat.• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicator is illuminatedwhen the front passenger's seatis occupied by an adult andhe/she sits properly (sittingupright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on theseat cushion with their seat belton, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor), have

that person sit in the rear seat.(Continued)




3 49

Driver's and passenger's front airbagYour vehicle is equipped with aSupplemental Restraint (Air Bag) Systemand lap/shoulder belts at both the driverand passenger seating positions. Theindications of the system's presence arethe letters "AIRBAG" embossed on theair bag pad cover in the steering wheeland the passenger's side front panel padabove the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed

under the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger's sidefront panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficientseverity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-er information about the driver's and frontpassenger's seat belt usage and impactseverity.

OLM039037

WARNINGIf the occupant classification sys-tem is not working properly, theSRS air bag warning light on

the instrument panel will il luminatebecause the passenger's front airbag is connected with the occupantclassification system. If there is amalfunction of the occupant classi-fication system, the "PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF" indicator will notilluminate and the passenger'sfront air bag will inflate in frontalimpact crashes even if there is nooccupant in the front passenger's

seat. If the SRS air bag warninglight does not illuminate when theignition switch is turned to the ONposition, remains illuminated afterapproximately 6 seconds when theignition switch is turned to the ONposition, or if it illuminates whilethe vehicle is being driven, have anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer inspectthe occupant classification systemand the SRS air bag system as

soon as possible.

OLM039038

Driver’s front air bag Passenger’s front air bag


Th t b lt b kl d t i if Additi ll hi l i i d



503

The seat belt buckle sensors determine ifthe driver and front passenger's seatbelts are fastened.

The passenger’s front air bag is designed

to help reduce the injury of children sit-ting close to the instrument panel in lowspeed collisions. However, children aresafer if they are restraint in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity and seatbelt usage, the SRSCM (SRS ControlModule) controls the air bag inflation.Failure to properly wear seat belts canincrease the risk or severity of injury inan accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equippedwith an occupant classification system inthe front passenger's seat. The occupantclassification system detects the pres-ence of a passenger in the front passen-

ger's seat and will turn off the front pas-senger's air bag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "Occupantclassification system" in this section.

WARNINGIf an occupant classification sys-tem is not working properly, theSRS air bag warning light on

the instrument panel will illuminatebecause the SRS air bag warninglight is connected with the occu-pant classification system. If theSRS air bag warning light does notilluminate when the ignition switchis turned to the ON position,remains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds when the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position,or if it illuminates while the vehicle

is being driven, have an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer inspect theadvanced SRS air bag system assoon as possible.

WARNINGDo not place any objects under-neath the front seats as they couldinterfere with the occupant classifi-cation system.




3 51

✽ NOTICE• Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the sunvisor.

• Advanced air bags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-vide enhanced occupant protection in

frontal crashes. Front air bags are notintended to deploy in collisions inwhich protection can be provided bythe pre-tensioner seat belt.

(Continued)

• Move your seat as far back aspractical from the front air bags,while still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

• You and your passengers shouldnever sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the air bags. Improperlypositioned driver and passengerscan be severely injured by inflat-ing air bags.

• Never lean against the door orcenter console – always sit in anupright position.

• Do not allow a passenger to ride

in the front seat when the “PAS-SENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicatoris illuminated, because the airbag will not deploy in the event ofa moderate or severe frontalcrash.

(Continued)

WARNINGAlways use seat belts and childrestraints – every trip, every time,everyone! Air bags inflate with con-

siderable force and in the blink ofan eye. Seat belts help keep occu-pants in proper position to obtainmaximum benefit from the air bag.Even with advanced air bags,improperly belted and unbeltedoccupants can be severely injuredwhen the air bag inflates. Alwaysfollow the precautions about seatbelts, air bags and occupant safetycontained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries and receive the maxi-mum safety benefit from yourrestraint system:

• Never place a child in any child orbooster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children inthe back seat. It is the safestplace for children of any age toride.

• Front and side air bags can injureoccupants improperly positionedin the front seats.

(Continued)

WARNINGIf you are considering modificationof your vehicle due to a disability,please contact the Hyundai

Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.


Rear impact



523

OEP036096N

OVQ036018N

1VQA2091

Rear impact

Side impact

Rollover

(Continued)

• No objects should be placed overor near the air bag modules onthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel, and the front passenger'spanel above the glove box,because any such object couldcause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to causethe air bags to deploy.

• Never place covers, blankets orseat warmers on the passengerseat as these may interfere withthe occupant classification sys-tem.

• Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing socould result in injury, due to acci-dental deployment of the air bagsor by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

• If the SRS air bag warning lightremains illuminated while thevehicle is being driven, have anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer

inspect the air bag system assoon as possible.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once –have an authorized HYUNDAIdealer replace the air bag imme-diately after deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploythe front air bags only when animpact is sufficiently severe andwhen the impact angle is lessthan 30° from the forward longitu-dinal axis of the vehicle.Additionally, the air bags will onlydeploy once. Seat belts must beworn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. Inaddition, front air bags will notdeploy in frontal crashes belowthe deployment threshold.

(Continued)




3 53

Side impact air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a sideimpact air bag in each front seat. Thepurpose of the air bag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt alone.

(Continued)

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-tion can result in serious or fatalinjury in a crash. All occupantsshould sit upright with the seat-back in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion withtheir seat belt on, legs comfort-ably extended and their feet onthe floor until the vehicle isparked and the ignition key isremoved.

• The SRS air bag system mustdeploy very rapidly to provideprotection in a crash. If an occu-pant is out of position because ofnot wearing a seat belt, the airbag may forcefully contact theoccupant causing serious or fatalinjuries.

(Continued)

• Even though your vehicle isequipped with the occupant clas-sification system, do not install achild restraint system in the frontpassenger seat position. A childrestraint system must never beplaced in the front seat.The infantor child could be severely injuredor killed by an air bag deploymentin case of an accident.

• Children age 12 and under mustalways be properly restrained inthe rear seat. Never allow chil-dren to ride in the front passen-ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he orshe must be properly belted andthe seat should be moved as farback as possible.

• For maximum safety protection inall types of crashes, all occu-pants including the driver shouldalways wear their seat beltswhether or not an air bag is alsoprovided at their seating positionto minimize the risk of severe

injury or death in the event of acrash. Do not sit or lean unneces-sarily close to the air bag whilethe vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

OLM032310N

OLM039039


• The side impact air bags are designed(C i d)



543

The side impact air bags are designedto deploy during certain side-impact col-lisions, depending on the crash severity,angle, speed and point of impact.

• The side impact air bags do not only

deploy on the side of the impact butalso on the opposite side.

• The side and/or curtain airbags onboth sides of the vehicle will deploy if arollover or possible rollover is detected.

• The side impact air bags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact orrollover situations.

(Continued)

• Do not install any accessories onthe side or near the side impactair bag.

• Do not place any objects over theair bag or between the air bagand yourself.

• Do not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) between thefront door and the front seat.Such objects may become dan-gerous projectiles and causeinjury if the supplemental sideimpact air bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-

ment of the side impact air bagthat may result in personal injury,avoid impact to the side impactsensor when the ignition switchis on.

• If the seat or seat cover is dam-aged, have the vehicle checkedand repaired by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer because yourvehicle is equipped with sideimpact air bags and an occupant

classification system.

WARNING• The side air bag is supplemental to

the driver's and the passenger'sseat belt systems and is not a sub-

stitute for them. Therefore yourseat belts must be worn at all timeswhile the vehicle is in operation.

• For best protection from the sideimpact air bag system and toavoid being injured by thedeploying side impact air bag,both front seat occupants shouldsit in an upright position with theseat belt properly fastened. Thedriver's hands should be placed

on the steering wheel at the 9:00and 3:00 positions. The passen-ger's arms and hands should beplaced on their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seatcovers.

• Use of seat covers could reduceor prevent the effectiveness ofthe system.

(Continued)

WARNING

Do not allow the passengers to leantheir heads or bodies onto doors,put their arms on the doors, stretchtheir arms out of the window, orplace objects between the doorsand passengers when they areseated on seats equipped with sideand/or curtain air bags.


• The curtain air bags are designed to(C ti d)



3 55

Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.

They are designed to help protect occu-pants in certain side impacts and to helpprevent them from ejecting out of thevehicle as a result of a rollover, especial-ly when the seatbelts are also in use.

g gdeploy during certain side impact colli-sions, depending on the crash severity,angle, speed and point of impact.

• The curtain air bags do not only deploy

on the side of the impact but also onthe opposite side.

• Also, the curtain air bags on both sidesof the vehicle will deploy in certainrollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are not designedto deploy in all side impact or rolloversituations.

WARNING

• In order for side and curtain airbags to provide the best protec-tion, front seat occupants andoutboard rear occupants shouldsit in an upright position with theseat belts properly fastened.Importantly, children should sit ina proper child restraint system inthe rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats, they must beseated in the proper childrestraint system. Make sure toposition the child restraint sys-tem as far away from the doorside as possible, and secure thechild restraint system in a lockedposition.

• Do not allow the passengers tolean their heads or bodies ontodoors, put their arms on thedoors, stretch their arms out ofthe window, or place objectsbetween the doors and passen-gers when they are seated onseats equipped with side and cur-tain air bags.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side curtainair bag system. This should onlybe done by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to follow the above instruc-tions can result in injury or death tothe vehicle occupants in an acci-dent.

OXM039055

OLM032311N


Why didn’t my air bag go off in a



563

y y g gcollision? (Inflation and non-infla-tion conditions of the air bag)There are many types of accidents inwhich the air bag would not be expect-

ed to provide additional protection.These include rear impacts, second orthird collisions in multiple impactaccidents, as well as low speedimpacts. In other words, just becauseyour vehicle is damaged and even if itis totally unusable, don’t be surprisedthat the air bags did not inflate.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor

(4) Side impact sensor

OLM039040N/OLM039041/OLM039042/OLM039043/OLM039044

1 2 3 4


(Continued)



3 57

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in afrontal collision depending on the intensi-ty, speed or angles of impact of the frontcollision.

1VQA2084

WARNING• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where airbags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected airbag deployment, which couldresult in serious personal injuryor death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is altered inany way, the air bags may deploywhen they should not or they maynot deploy when they should,causing severe injury or death.

Therefore, do not try to perform

maintenance on or around the airbag sensors. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Problems may arise if the sensorinstallation angles are changeddue to the deformation of thefront bumper, body, front doorand B pillars where side collisionsensors are installed. Have thevehicle checked and repaired by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.(Continued)

(Continued)

• Installing bumper guards (or sidestep or running board) or replac-ing a bumper (or front door mod-ule) with non-genuine parts mayadversely affect your vehicle’scollision and air bag deploymentperformance.

WARNINGIf your vehicle is equipped with sideand curtain air bag, set the ignitionswitch to OFF or ACC positionwhen the vehicle is being towed to

prevent inadvertent AIR BAGDeployment.

The side and curtain air bag maydeploy when the ignitions is ON,and the rollover sensor detects thesituation as a rollover.


Also, the side impact and curtain air bagsd i d t i fl t h ll i



583

Side impact and curtain air bags

Side impact and curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate when an impact isdetected by side collision sensors

depending on the strength, speed orangles of impact resulting from a sideimpact collision.

are designed to inflate when a rollover isdetected by the rollover sensor.

Although the front air bags (driver’s andfront passenger’s air bags) are designed

to inflate in frontal collisions, they alsomay inflate in other types of collisions ifthe front impact sensors detect a suffi-cient frontal force in another type ofimpact. Side impact and curtain air bagsare designed to inflate in certain sideimpact collisions. They may inflate inother type of collisions where a side forceis detected by the sensors. Side airbagand/or curtain airbags may also inflatewhere rollover sensors indicate the pos-

sibility of a rollover occurring (even ifnone actually occurs) or in other situa-tions, incluiding when the vehicle is tiltedwhile being towed. Even wnere sideand/or curtain airbags would not prorideimpact protection in a rollover, however,they will deploy to prevent ejection ofoccupants, especially those who arerestrained with seat belts.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimproved roads,

the air bags may deploy. Drive carefullyon unimproved roads or on surfaces notdesigned for vehicle traffic to preventunintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the airbags may not deploy. The air bags are

designed not to deploy in such casesbecause they may not provide benefitsbeyond the protection of the seat beltsin such collisions.

1VQA2086

OVQ036018N

OLM032312N




3 59

• Air bags are not designed to inflate inrear collisions, because occupants aremoved backward by the force of the

impact. In this case, inflated air bagswould not be able to provide any addi-tional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in sideimpact collisions, because occupantsmove to the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, frontal air bagdeployment would not provide addi-tional occupant protection.

• In an angled collision, the force ofimpact may direct the occupants in adirection where the air bags would not

be able to provide any additional bene-fit, and thus the sensors may notdeploy any air bags.

1VQA2089OVQ036018NOUN036087




603

• Just before impact, drivers often brakeheavily. Such heavy braking lowers thefront portion of the vehicle causing it to

“ride” under a vehicle with a higherground clearance. Air bags may notinflate in this "under-ride" situationbecause deceleration forces that aredetected by sensors may be signifi-cantly reduced by such “under-ride”collisions.

• Front air bags may not inflate in rolloveraccidents where the SRSCM indicatesthat the SRSCM indicates that the front

air bag deployment would not provideadditional occupant protection.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehiclecollides with objects such as utilitypoles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated to one area andthe full force of the impact is not deliv-ered to the sensors.

1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092


SRS Care

Th SRS i i ll i f WARNING(Continued)



3 61

The SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand there are no parts you can safelyservice by yourself. If the SRS air bagwarning light does not illuminate, or con-

tinuously remains on, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or anywork on the steering wheel, the frontpassenger's panel, front seats and roofrails must be performed by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling ofthe SRS system may result in serious

personal injury.

WARNING• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the additionof any kind of badges to the pad

covers or modifications to thebody structure, can adverselyaffect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

• Not only the modification of theparts where the SRS sensors arebut also the modification of otherparts of the vehicle may affect theSRS performance and lead topossible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-

ers, use only a soft, dry cloth orone which has been moistenedwith plain water. Solvents orcleaners could adversely affectthe air bag covers and properdeployment of the system.

• No objects should be placed overor near the air bag modules on thesteering wheel, instrument panel,and the front passenger's panelabove the glove box, because anysuch object could cause harm if thevehicle is in a crash severe enoughto cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

( )

• If the air bags inflate, they mustbe replaced by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring, or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing socould result in injury, due to acci-dental inflation of the air bags orby rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-tem must be discarded, or if thevehicle must be scrapped, certainsafety precautions must beobserved.An authorized HYUNDAIdealer knows these precautionsand can give you the necessaryinformation. Failure to follow theseprecautions and procedures couldincrease the risk of personalinjury.

• If your vehicle was flooded andhas soaked carpeting or water onthe floor, you shouldn't try tostart the engine; have the cartowed to an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.


Additional safety precautions• Never let passengers ride in the

• Keep occupants away from the airbag covers All occupants should sit WARNING



623

• Never let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. All occupants shouldsit upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on thefloor.

• Passengers should not move out ofor change seats while the vehicle ismoving. A passenger who is not wear-ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-gency stop can be thrown against theinside of the vehicle, against otheroccupants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed torestrain one occupant. If more than

one person uses the same seat belt,they could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improveoccupant comfort or reposition the seatbelt can reduce the protection providedby the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place hardor sharp objects between them-

selves and the air bags. Carryinghard or sharp objects on your lap or inyour mouth can result in injuries if anair bag inflates.

bag covers. All occupants should situpright, fully back in their seats withtheir seat belts on and their feet on thefloor. If occupants are too close to the

air bag covers, they could be injured ifthe air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects on ornear the air bag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the front orside air bag covers could interfere withthe proper operation of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.Modification of the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the sup-plemental restraint system sensing

components or side air bags.• Do not place items under the frontseats. Placing items under the frontseats could interfere with the operationof the supplemental restraint systemsensing components and wiring har-nesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on yourlap. The infant or child could be seri-ously injured or killed in the event of acrash. All infants and children should

be properly restrained in appropriatechild safety seats or seat belts in therear seat.

Adding equipment to or modifyingyour air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changingyour vehicle's frame, bumper system,front end or side sheet metal or rideheight, this may affect the operation ofyour vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to beshifted too close to a deploying air

bag, strike the interior structure orbe thrown from the vehicle result-ing in serious injury or death.

• Always sit upright with the seat-back in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with yourseat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and your feet on the floor.

• Always have the ignition OFFwhen the vehicle is being towed orwhere it may otherwise be tilted,

since the side and/or curtainairbags may inflate if the sensorsinterpet those tilt angles as apotential rollover.

• Be careful not to cause impact tothe doors when the ignition is ON.The air bags may inflate.




3 63

Air bag warning labelAir bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alertthe driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

OLM039058N/OLM039050N/OLM039051

Keys / 4-3

Remote keyless entry / 4-5



4

Remote keyless entry / 4 5

Theft-alarm system / 4-7

Door locks / 4-9

Tailgate / 4-13

Windows / 4-15Hood / 4-19

Fuel filler door / 4-21

Panoramic sunroof / 4-24

Steering wheel / 4-28

Mirrors / 4-30

Instrument cluster / 4-33

Rearview camera / 4-49

Hazard warning flasher / 4-49

Lighting / 4-50

Wipers and washers / 4-54

Interior light / 4-57

Defroster / 4-59

Manual climate control system / 4-61

Automatic climate control system / 4-70

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-77Storage compartment / 4-80


Interior features / 4-82

Exterior features / 4-88



Audio system / 4-89

Features of your vehicle4


Record your key number

The key code number is

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition key■ Type B■ Type A



4 3

The key code number isstamped on the barcode tag attached to thekey set. Should you

lose your keys, thisnumber will enable an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer to duplicate the keyseasily. Remove the bar code tag andstore it in a safe place. Also, record thecode number and keep it in a safe place(not in the vehicle).

Key operationsUsed to start the engine, lock and unlockthe doors.

g yLeaving children unattended in avehicle with the ignition key is dan-gerous even if the key is not in the

ignition switch. Children copyadults and they could place the keyin the ignition switch. The ignitionkey would enable children to oper-ate power windows or other con-trols, or even make the vehiclemove, which could result in seriousbodily injury or even death. Neverleave the keys in your vehicle withunsupervised children.

WARNINGUse only HYUNDAI original partsfor the ignition key in your vehicle.If an aftermarket key is used, theignition switch may not return toON after START. If this happens, thestarter will continue to operatecausing damage to the startermotor and possible fire due toexcessive current in the wiring.

OED036001A/OFD047002-A


Immobilizer system (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with an

✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or lose your

WARNING



44

y q ppelectronic engine immobilizer system toreduce the risk of unauthorized vehicleuse.

Your immobilizer system is comprised ofa small transponder in the ignition keyand electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, wheneveryou insert your ignition key into the igni-tion switch and turn it to ON, it checksand determines and verifies if the ignitionkey is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, theengine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the

engine will not start.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.The immobilizer system activates auto-matically. Without a valid ignition key foryour vehicle, the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-der and turn it to the ON position.

✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not use thekey with other immobilizer keys around.Otherwise the engine may not start ormay stop soon after it starts. Keep eachkey separately not to have any malfunc-tion after you receive your new vehicle.

y y ykeys, consult an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

In order to prevent theft of yourvehicle, do not leave spare keysanywhere in your vehicle. Your

immobilizer password is a cus-tomer unique password and shouldbe kept confidential. Do not leavethis number anywhere in your vehi-cle.

CAUTIONThe transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service,however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

CAUTIONDo not put metal accessories near the ignition switch.The engine may not start for the metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal from normally transmitting.

CAUTIONDo not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system

are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.


Unlock (2)

Driver's door is unlocked if the unlockb tt i d Th h d

Alarm (3)

The horn sounds and hazard warningli ht fl h f b t 30 d if thi

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY



4 5

Remote keyless entry systemoperations

Lock (1)

All doors (and tailgate) are locked if thelock button is pressed.

If all doors (and tailgate) are closed, thehazard warning lights will blink once toindicate that all doors (and tailgate) arelocked.

The chime sounds once if the lock buttonis pressed once more within 4 seconds.

However, if any door (or tailgate) remainsopen, the hazard warning lights and the

chime will not operate. If all doors (andtailgate) are closed after the lock buttonis pressed, the hazard warning lightsblink.

button is pressed once. The hazardwarning lights will blink twice to indicatethat the driver's door is unlocked.

All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked ifthe unlock button is pressed once morewithin 4 seconds. The hazard warninglights will blink twice again to indicatethat all doors (and tailgate) are unlocked.

After depressing this button, the doors (andtailgate) will be locked automatically unlessyou open any door within 30 seconds.

✽ NOTICEYou can change the system to unlock all

doors by one pressing the unlock buttonon the transmitter. If you want this fea-ture (central door unlock mode), per-form the following:

Unlock mode conversion (two stageunlock mode ↔ central door unlock mode)

The unlock mode is changed alternatelyby pressing the lock button and unlock

button on the transmitter at the sametime for 4 seconds or more. The hazardwarning lights will blink four times toindicate that the mode conversion iscompleted.

lights flash for about 30 seconds if thisbutton is pressed. To stop the horn andlights, press any button on the transmit-ter.

Transmitter precautions

✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if any of following occur:• The ignition key is in ignition switch.• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer.

OLM049002N


For replacement transmitters, see anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmit-ter reprogramming

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away from



64

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

Battery replacementTransmitter uses a 3 volt lithium batterywhich will normally last for several years.

When replacement is necessary, use thefollowing procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-tly pry open the transmitter centercover.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery(CR2032).When replacing the battery,make sure the battery positive “+”sym-bol faces up as indicated in the illus-tration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order

of removal.

ter reprogramming.Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or other liquids,it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. If the keyless entrysystem is inoperative due to changes

or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance, it will not be covered byyour manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

CAUTION

• The keyless entry system transmitter is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery,contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to malfunc-

tion. Be sure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

OLM049200

CAUTIONAn inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environ-

ment and human health.Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.


THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

Armed stagePark the car and stop the engine. Armthe system as described below

The system can also be armed by lock-ing the doors with the key from the frontdoors; however the hazard warning



4 7

This system is designed to provide pro-tection from unauthorized entry into thecar. This system is operated in three

stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, thesecond is the "Theft-alarm" stage, andthe third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audiblealarm with blinking of the hazard warninglights.

the system as described below.

1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-tion switch and exit the vehicle.

2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)and engine hood are closed andlatched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, thehazard warning lights will blink once toindicate that the system is armed.

If any door (or tailgate) or engine hoodremains open, the hazard warning lights

and the chime will not operate and thetheft-alarm will not arm. If all doors (andtailgate) and engine hood are closedafter the lock button is pressed, the haz-ard warning lights blink once.

doors; however, the hazard warninglights will not blink using this method.

✽NOTICEThe theft-alarm system by the key can

be deactivated by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.If you want this feature, consult anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not arm the system until all pas-sengers have left the vehicle. If thesystem is armed while a passenger(s)remains in the vehicle, the alarm may

be activated when the remaining pas-senger(s) leave the vehicle. If anydoor (or tailgate) or engine hood isopened within 30 seconds after thesystem enters the armed stage, thesystem is disarmed to prevent anunnecessary alarm.

Armed

stage

Theft-alarm

stageDisarmed

stage


Theft-alarm stageThe alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the system is

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when thedoors (and tailgate) are unlocked with the

CAUTIONDo not change alter or adjust the



84

following occurs while the system isarmed.

• A front or rear door is opened without

using the ignition key or transmitter.• The tailgate is opened without usingthe transmitter.

• The engine hood is opened.

The horn will sound and the hazardwarning lights will blink continuously forapproximately 27 seconds, and repeatthe horn 2 times unless the system is dis-armed. To turn off the system, unlock thedoors with the ignition key or transmitter.

doors (and tailgate) are unlocked with thetransmitter or the ignition key.

After depressing the unlock button, the

hazard warning lights will blink twice toindicate that the system is disarmed.

After depressing the unlock button, if anydoor (or tailgate) is not opened within 30seconds, the system will be rearmed.

✽ NOTICE• Avoid trying to start the engine while

the alarm is activated. The vehiclestarting motor is disabled during thetheft-alarm stage.

If the system is not disarmed with thetransmitter, insert the key into theignition switch, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position and wait for30 seconds. Then the system will bedisarmed. (if equipped)

• If you lose your keys, consult yourauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not change, alter or adjust the theft-alarm system because it could cause the theft-alarm system to malfunction. The system should only be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the theft-alarm system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.


Unlock mode conversion (two stageunlock mode ↔ central door unlock mode)

✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

DOOR LOCKS



4 9

Operating door locks from out-side the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the frontof the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock the door with a key, all vehi-cle doors will lock automatically.

• From the driver’s door, turn the key tothe right once to unlock the driver’sdoor and once more within 4 secondsto unlock all doors.

✽ NOTICE

You can change the system to unlock alldoors by turning the key to the rightonce. If you want this feature (centraldoor unlock mode), perform the follow-ing:

mode)

The unlock mode is changed alternatelyby pressing the lock button and unlock

button on the transmitter at the sametime for 4 seconds or more. The hazardwarning lights will blink four times toindicate that the mode conversion iscompleted.

• Doors can also be locked and unlockedwith the transmitter.

• Once the doors are unlocked, they maybe opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door by

hand. Make sure that doors are closedsecurely.

❈ If your vehicle is equipped with theremote keyless entry system, there is nokey lock on the front passenger’s door.

and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operatingtemporarily in order to protect thecircuit and prevent damage to systemcomponents.

OLM049008

Lock Unlock

WARNING• If you don't close the door secure-

ly, the door may open again.

• Be careful that someone's bodyand hands are not trapped whenclosing the door.


• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switch andany front door is open.



104

• To lock a door without the key, push theinside door lock button (1) or centraldoor lock switch (2) to the “Lock” posi-

tion and close the door (3).• If you lock the door with the centraldoor lock switch (2), all vehicle doorswill lock automatically.

✽ NOTICEAlways remove the ignition key, firmlyengage the parking brake, close all win-dows and lock all doors when leavingyour vehicle unattended.

Operating door locks from insidethe vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lockbutton (1) to the “Unlock” position.Thered mark (2) on button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-ton (1) to the “Lock”position. If the dooris locked properly, the red mark (2) onthe door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the driver’s(or front passenger’s) door is pulledwhen the door lock button is in lockposition, the button is unlocked anddoor opens.

y p

OLM049010

LockUnlock

WARNING - Door lock mal-

functionIf a power door lock ever fails tofunction while you are in the vehi-cle, try one or more of the followingtechniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock featurerepeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side.

• Move to the cargo area and openthe tailgate.

OLM049009


• When pushing down on the front por-tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doorswill lock.

WARNING - Unlockedvehicles

Driver’s door



4 11

With central door lock switch

Operate by depressing the central doorlock switch.

• When pushing down on the rear por-tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doorswill unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch and anyfront door is opened, the doors will notlock even though the front portion (1) ofcentral door lock switch is pressed.

Leaving your vehicle unlocked caninvite theft or possible harm to youor others from someone hiding inyour vehicle while you are gone.Always remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannot escapethe vehicle. Furthermore, childrenmight operate features of the vehi-cle that could injure them, or theycould encounter other harm, possi-bly from someone gaining entry tothe vehicle. Never leave children oranimals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-cle is in motion to prevent acci-dental opening of the door.Locked doors will also discour-age potential intruders when thevehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doorsand watch for vehicles, motorcy-cles, bicycles or pedestriansapproaching the vehicle in thepath of the door. Opening a doorwhen something is approachingcan cause damage or injury.

OLM049011

OLM049209N

Passenger’s door


Auto door lock/unlock feature

• All doors will be automatically lockedwhen shifting the transaxle shift lever

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outsidedoor handle.



124

when shifting the transaxle shift leverout of P (Park) with engine is running.

• All doors will be automatically unlocked

when shifting the transaxle shift leverinto P (Park) with engine is running.

✽ NOTICEAn authorized HYUNDAI dealer canactivate or deactivate some auto doorlock/unlock features as follows;• Speed sensing auto door lock

• Auto door unlock by using the dri-ver's door lock button

• Auto door unlock when the ignitionkey is removed from the ignitionswitch

• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting thetransmission shift lever out of P(Park) or into P (Park)

If you want to activate or deactivatesome door lock/unlock feature, consultan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to helpprevent children from accidentally open-

ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should beused whenever children are in the vehi-cle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located onthe rear edge of the door to the lock( ) position. When the child safetylock is in the lock position, the reardoor will not open even though theinner door handle is pulled.

Even though the doors may be unlocked,the rear door will not open by pulling theinner door handle (1) until the rear doorchild safety lock is unlocked (➡).

OLM049012

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out and beseverely injured or killed. To pre-vent children from opening the reardoors from the inside, the rear door

safety locks should be used when-ever children are in the vehicle.


✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, door lock anddoor mechanisms may not work proper-

TAILGATE



4 13

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlockedwhen all doors are locked or unlocked

with the key, transmitter or central doorlock switch.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be openedby pressing the handle switch andpulling the handle up.

y p ply due to freezing conditions.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and pushdown the tailgate firmly. Make sure that

the tailgate is securely latched.

OLM049013 OLM049014

WARNINGThe tailgate swings upward. Makesure no objects or people are nearthe rear of the vehicle when open-ing the tailgate.

CAUTIONMake certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle.Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the tailgate open,you will draw dangerous exhaustfumes into your vehicle which cancause serious injury or death tovehicle occupants.

If you must drive with the tailgate

open, keep the air vents and all win-dows open so that additional out-side air comes into the vehicle.


WARNING• For emergencies, be fully aware

WARNING - Rear cargoarea



144

Emergency tailgate safety releaseYour vehicle is equipped with the emer-gency tailgate safety release lever locat-

ed on the bottom of the tailgate. Whensomeone is inadvertently locked in theluggage compartment, if the lever ispushed, the tailgate latch mechanism isreleased and the tailgate is opened bypushing rearward.

of the location of the emergencytailgate safety release lever inthis vehicle and how to open thetailgate if you are accidentallylocked in the luggage compart-ment.

• No one should be allowed tooccupy the luggage compartmentof the vehicle at any time. Theluggage compartment is a verydangerous location in the eventof a crash.

• Use the release lever for emer-gencies only. Use extreme cau-tion, especially while the vehicleis in motion.

OLM049015

Occupants should never ride in therear cargo area where no restraintsare available. To avoid injury in theevent of an accident or suddenstops, occupants should always beproperly restrained.


(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power win-dow switch

(3) R d (l ft) i d it h

WINDOWS



4 15

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power windowswitch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window up/down*(Driver’s window)

(7) Power window lock switch

* : if equipped

✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, powerwindowsmay not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

OLM049020N


Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to operate.



164

Each door has a power window switchthat controls the door's window.The driv-

er has a power window lock switch whichcan block the operation of passengerwindows. The power windows can beoperated for approximately 30 secondsafter the ignition key is removed or turnedto the ACC or LOCK position. However, ifthe front doors are opened, the powerwindows cannot be operated within the30 second period after the ignition keyremoval.

✽ NOTICEWhile driving with the rear windowsdown or with the sunroof (if equipped)in an open (or partially open) position,your vehicle may demonstrate a windbuffeting or pulsation noise. This noiseis a normal occurrence and can bereduced or eliminated by taking the fol-lowing actions. If the noise occurs withone or both of the rear windows down,partially lower both front windows

approximately one inch. If you experi-ence the noise with the sunroof open,slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

The driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all the win-

dows in the vehicle.To open or close a window, press downor pull up the front portion of the corre-sponding switch to the first detent posi-tion (5).

Auto down window (if equipped) (Driver’s window)

Pressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent posi-tion (6) completely lowers the driver’swindow even when the switch isreleased. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up the switch momentarilyto the opposite direction of the windowmovement.

OLM049021 OLM049022


✽ NOTICEThe automatic reverse feature for thedriver’s window is only active when the“auto up” feature is used by fully



4 17

Auto up/down window (if equipped) (Driver's window) Depressing or pulling up the power windowswitch momentarily to the second detentposition (6) completely lowers or lifts thewindow even when the switch is released.To stop the window at the desired positionwhile the window is in operation, pull up ordepress and release the switch to theopposite direction of the movement.

If the power window is not operated cor-rectly, the automatic power window systemmust be reset as follows:

1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

2. Close driver’s window and continuepulling up on driver’s power windowswitch for at least 1 second after the win-dow is completely closed.

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window isblocked by an object or part of the body,the window will detect the resistance andwill stop upward movement. The windowwill then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistancewhile the power window switch is pulledup continuously, the window will stopupward movement then lower approxi-mately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the powerwindow switch is pulled up continuouslyagain within 5 seconds after the windowis lowered by the automatic windowreversal feature, the automatic windowreversal will not operate.

“auto up” feature is used by fullypulling up the switch. The automaticreverse feature will not operate if thewindow is raised using the halfway posi-tion on the power window switch.

WARNINGAlways check for obstructionsbefore raising any window to avoidinjuries or vehicle damage. If anobject less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) indiameter is caught between thewindow glass and the upper win-

dow channel, the automatic reversewindow may not detect the resist-ance and will not stop and reversedirection.

OUN026013OLM049023


CAUTION• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do not

WARNING - Windows• NEVER leave the ignition key in

the vehicle



184

Power window lock button

• The driver can disable the power win-dow switches on the passenger doorsby depressing the power window lockswitch located on the driver’s door toLOCK (pressed).

• When the power window lock switchis ON, the driver’s master controlcannot operate the passenger doorpower windows.

OLM049024

the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will

also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposing directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

the vehicle.

• NEVER leave any child unattend-ed in the vehicle. Even veryyoung children may inadvertentlycause the vehicle to move, entan-gle themselves in the windows,or otherwise injure themselves orothers.

• Always double check to makesure all arms, hands, head andother obstructions are safely outof the way before closing a win-dow.

• Do not allow children to play withthe power windows. Keep the dri-ver’s door power window lock switch in the LOCK position(depressed). Serious injury canresult from unintentional windowoperation by the child.

• Do not extend any head or armsoutside through the windowopening while driving.


HOOD



4 19

Opening the hood1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop openslightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise thehood slightly, pull the secondary latch(1) inside of the hood center and liftthe hood (2).

3.Pull out the support rod from theengine room.

4.Hold the hood open with the supportrod.

OLM049025 OLM049026 OLM049027

WARNING - Hot partsGrasp the support rod in the areawrapped in rubber. The rubber willhelp prevent you from being burnedby hot metal when the engine ishot.

WARNINGOpen the hood after turning off theengine on a flat surface, shiftingthe shift lever to the P(Park) posi-tion for automatic transaxle and tothe 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) formanual transaxle, and setting theparking brake.


Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:

• All filler caps in engine compartment

WARNING• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removed



204

All filler caps in engine compartmentmust be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-bustible material must be removedfrom the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip toprevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft. (30cm) above the closed position and letit drop. Make sure that it locks intoplace.

bfrom the hood opening. Closingthe hood with an obstruction

present in the hood opening mayresult in property damage orsevere personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

• Always double check to be surethat the hood is firmly latchedbefore driving away. If it is notlatched, the hood could open

while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility,which might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with thehood in the raised position, asvision is obstructed and the hoodcould fall or be damaged.


Closing the fuel filler door1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks” one time. This indicates thatthe cap is securely tightened.

FUEL FILLER DOOR



4 21

Opening the fuel filler doorThe fuel filler door must be opened frominside the vehicle by pulling up the fuelfiller door opener lever.

✽ NOTICEIf the fuel filler door does not openbecause ice has formed around it, taplightly or push on the door to break theice and release the door. Do not pry onthe door. If necessary, spray around thedoor with an approved de-icer fluid (donot use radiator anti-freeze) or move thevehicle to a warm place and allow the ice

to melt.

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler door, pull the fuelfiller door opener up.

3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to fullyopen.

4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel fillercap (2) counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

p y g

2. Close the fuel filler door and push itlightly making sure that it is securely

closed.

OSA047022 OLM049028

WARNING - Refueling• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skinand thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always removethe fuel cap carefully and slowly.If the cap is venting fuel or if you

hear a hissing sound, wait untilthe condition stops before com-pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzleautomatically shuts off whenrefueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks onetime, otherwise the Check Engine

light will illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-dent.


(Continued)

Use only approved portable plas-tic fuel containers designed tocarry and store gasoline

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicleonce you have begun refuelingsince you can generate static

WARNING - Refueling dan-gers

Automotive fuels are flammable



224

carry and store gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones while

refueling. Electric current and/orelectronic interference from cel-lular phones can potentiallyignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling iscomplete, check to make sure thefiller cap and filler door are

securely closed, before startingthe engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighterand DO NOT SMOKE or leave a litcigarette in your vehicle while ata gas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel ishighly flammable and can, whenignited, result in fire.

(Continued)

since you can generate staticelectricity by touching, rubbing

or sliding against any item or fab-ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)capable of producing static elec-tricity. Static electricity dischargecan ignite fuel vapors resulting inrapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you shouldonce again eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching a metal partof the vehicle, away from the fuel

filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-line source.

• When using an approvedportable fuel container, be sure toplace the container on theground prior to refueling. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling hasbegun, contact with the vehicleshould be maintained until thefilling is complete.

(Continued)

materials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines care-

fully. Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or death by fireor explosion.

• Read and follow all warningsposted at the gas station facility.

• Before refueling, note the loca-tion of the Emergency GasolineShut-Off, if available, at the gasstation facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,you should eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching another metalpart of the vehicle, a safe dis-tance away from the fuel fillerneck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)


(Continued)

• If a fire breaks out during refuel-ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-cle, and immediately contact the

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested in section 1



4 23

cle, and immediately contact themanager of the gas station and

then contact the local fire depart-ment or 911. Follow any safetyinstructions they provide.

ments" suggested in section 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

• After refueling, make sure the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.


Sunroof open warning chime(if equipped)

If the driver removes the ignition key(smart key: turns off the engine) and

PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION• Do not continue to move the sun-

roof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened closed or tilted



244

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,you can slide or tilt your sunroof with thesunroof control lever located on the over-head console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in theON position.

opens the driver-side door when the sun-roof is not fully closed, the warning chime

will sound for approximately 7 seconds.However, if the smart key is in the smartkey holder, the warning chime will notsound.

Close the sunroof securely when leavingyour vehicle.

✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freez-

ing conditions.• After a vehicle is washed or in a rain-

storm be sure to wipe off any waterthat is on the sunroof before operatingit.

✽ NOTICEThe sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the

slide position but can be slid while in atilt position.

OLM049030

is fully opened, closed, or tilted.Damage to the motor or system

components could occur.• Make sure the sunroof is closed

fully when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is open, rain or snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well as cause theft.


To open the sunroof automatically:

Pull the sunroof control lever backward tothe second detent position and thenrelease it. The sunroof will slide openautomatically open all the way

WARNING• Never adjust the sunroof or roller

blind while driving. This couldresult in loss of control and an



4 25

Sliding the sunroofBefore opening or closing the sunroof,open the roller blind.

To open the sunroof (manual slide fea-ture), pull the sunroof control lever back-ward to the first detent position.

To close the sunroof (manual slide fea-ture), push or pull the sunroof controllever with safety switch (1) forward ordownward to the first detent position.

automatically open all the way.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,

pull or push the sunroof control levermomentarily.

To close the sunroof automatically:

Push the sunroof control lever forward tothe second detent position and thenrelease it. The sunroof will automaticallyclose all the way.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,pull or push the sunroof control levermomentarily.

OLM049031

result in loss of control and anaccident that may cause death,

serious injury, or property dam-age.

• HYUNDAI does not recommendinstalling a roof rack on a vehiclewith the panoramic sunroof.

• All occupants of the vehicle mustwear their seat belts at all times.Seat belts and child restraintsreduce serious or fatal injuriesfor all occupants in the event of acollision or sudden stop.

WARNINGDo not allow children operate thesunroof. Closing a sunroof onsomeone can cause serious injury,and in some cases, even death.


WARNING - Sunroof• Be careful that no head, hands

and body parts are obstructed bya closing sunroof



264

Automatic reversal

If an object is detected while the sunroof isclosing automatically, it will reverse thedirection, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work ifa small obstacle is between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the sunroof beforeclosing it.

Tilting the sunroof

Before opening or closing the sunroof,open the roller blind.

To open the sunroof (manual feature),push the sunroof control lever upwarduntil the sunroof moves to the desiredposition.

To close the sunroof, pull the sunrooflever downward until the sunroof movesto the desired position.

a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend the face, neck,

arms or body outside the sunroofwhile driving.

• Make sure your hands and headare safely out of the way beforeclosing a sunroof.

CAUTION• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.

• Do not leave the roller blind closed while the sunroof is opened.

OLM049032OXM049029

WARNING• Never activate the auto reverse

function intentionally with any of

your body parts.• The auto reverse function may notwork if something gets caught justbefore the sunroof fully closes.


Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, you must resetyour sunroof system as follows:



4 27

Roller blindThe roller blinds are installed inside ofthe sunroof and glass roof.

Open or close the roller blind manuallyusing the handle (1) when you need to.

Before opening or closing the sunroof,open the roller blind.

✽ NOTICEIt is normal for wrinkles to form on theblind because of its material character-istic.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.2. Open the roller blind.

3. Close the sunroof.

4. Release the sunroof control lever.

5. Push the sunroof control lever forwardin the direction of close (about 10 sec-onds) until the sunroof is moved a lit-tle. Then, release the lever.

6. Push the sunroof control lever forwardin the direction of close until the sun-roof operates as follows;

TILT OPEN → SLIDE OPEN →

SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-tem has been reset.

OXM049031N

CAUTIONOperation of the roller blind without using the handle (1) may cause mis- alignment or malfunction.


Electric power steering

The power steering uses a motor toassist you in steering the vehicle. If theengine is off or if the power steering sys-tem becomes inoperative the vehicle

✽ NOTICEThe following symptoms may occurdur-ing normal vehicle operation:• The EPS warning light does not illu-

minate

Tilt steering/Telescope steering(if equipped)Tilt steering allows you to adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. You canalso raise the steering wheel to give your

STEERING WHEEL



284

tem becomes inoperative, the vehiclemay still be steered, but it will require

increased steering effort.The motor driven power steering is con-trolled by a power steering control unitwhich senses the steering wheel torque,steering wheel position and vehiclespeed to command the motor.

The steering wheel becomes heavier asthe vehicle’s speed increases andbecomes lighter as the vehicle’s speeddecreases for optimum steering control.

Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the power steer-ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

minate.• The steering wheel becomes heavier

after turning the ignition switch on.This happens as the system performsthe EPS system diagnostics. When thediagnostics is completed, the steeringwheel will return to its normal condi-tion.

• Click noise may be heard from theEPS relay after the ignition switch isturned to the ON or LOCK position.

• Motor noise may be heard when thevehicle is at a stop or at a low driving

speed.• If the Electric Power Steering System

does not operate normally, the warn-ing light will illuminate on the instru-ment cluster. The steering wheel maybecome difficult to control or operateabnormally. Take your vehicle to anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer andhave the vehicle checked as soon aspossible.

• When you operate the steering wheel

in low temperature, abnormal noisecould occur. If temperature rises, thenoise will disappear. This is a normalcondition.

g g ylegs more room when you exit and enter

the vehicle (if equipped).

The steering wheel should be positionedso that it is comfortable for you to drive,while permitting you to see the instru-ment panel warning lights and gauges.

WARNING• Never adjust the angle and height

of steering wheel while driving.

You may lose your steering con-trol and cause severe personalinjury or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steeringwheel both up and down to becertain it is locked in position.


CAUTIONDo not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-



4 29

To change the steering wheel angle, pulldown the lock-release lever (1), adjustthe steering wheel to the desired angle(2) and the desired position (if equipped)

(3), then pull up the lock-release lever tolock the steering wheel in place. Be sureto adjust the steering wheel to thedesired position before driving.

✽ NOTICEAfter adjustment, sometimes the lock-release lever may not lock the steeringwheel.It is not a malfunction. This occurswhen two gears engage. In this case,

adjust the steering wheel again and thenlock the steering wheel.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn sym-bol on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

✽ NOTICETo sound the horn, press the area indi-cated by the horn symbol on your steer-ing wheel (see illustration). The hornwill operate only when this area ispressed.

OLM049033L

pointed object.

OLM049034


Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror to center onthe view through the rear window. Makethis adjustment before you start driving.

MIRRORS

Night

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do

l l di l



304

Day/night rearview mirror

Make this adjustment before you startdriving and while the day/night lever is inthe day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce glare from the headlights of vehi-cles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

WARNING - Rear visibilityDo not place objects in the rearseat or cargo area which wouldinterfere with your vision throughthe rear window.

OLM049035

Day

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as the liquid cleaner may enter the mirror housing.

WARNINGDo not modify the inside mirror anddo not install a wide mirror. It could

result in injury, during an accidentor deployment of the air bag.


Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust mirror angles beforedriving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview

CAUTIONDo not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict

t f th i d t

WARNINGDo not adjust or fold the outsiderearview mirrors while the vehicleis moving.This could result in loss



4 31

gmirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch. The mir-ror heads can be folded back to preventdamage during an automatic car wash orwhen passing in a narrow street.

WARNING - Rearview mir-rors

• The right outside rearview mirroris convex. Objects seen in themirror are closer than they

appear.• Use your interior rearview mirror

or direct observation to deter-mine the actual distance of fol-lowing vehicles when changinglanes.

movement of the mirror, do not

force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with warm water.

CAUTIONIf the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) to release the

frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

of control, and an accident which

could cause death, serious injuryor property damage.


CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor contin- ues to operate while the switch is



324

Remote control

The electric remote control mirror switchallows you to adjust the position of theleft and right outside rearview mirrors. To

adjust the position of either mirror, pushthe switch (1) to R or L to select the rightside mirror or the left side mirror, thenpress a corresponding point on the mirroradjustment control to position the select-ed mirror up, down, left or right.

After adjustment, put the switch into neu-tral (center) position to prevent the inad-vertent adjustment.

ues to operate while the switch is

depressed. Do not depress the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand.Doing so may damage the parts.

OLM049039


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER



4 33

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5. Shift position indicator

6. Fuel gauge

7. Odometer/Trip computer*

8. Warning and indicator lights

* : if equipped

OLM049051N

* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.For more details refer to the "Gauges" in the next pages.




344

Instrument panel illumination

When the vehicle’s parking lights orheadlights are on, press the illuminationcontrol button to adjust the brightness of

the instrument panel illumination.

Gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the forwardspeed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in milesper hour and/or kilometers per hour.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approxi-mate number of engine revolutions perminute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correctshift points and to prevent lugging and/orover-revving the engine.

When the door is open, or if the engine isnot started within 1 minute, the tachome-ter pointer may move slightly in ON posi-tion with the engine OFF. This movementis normal and will not affect the accuracyof the tachometer once the engine is run-ning.

OLM049052 OLM049056OLM049054N


CAUTIONDo not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine damage

WARNINGNever remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. The enginecoolant is under pressure andcould cause severe burns Wait



4 35

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of theengine coolant when the ignition switchis ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “If the engine overheats” in section 6.

CAUTIONIf the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the “H” position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

age. could cause severe burns. Wait

until the engine is cool beforeadding coolant to the reservoir.

OLM049057


WARNING - Fuel gaugeRunning out of fuel can exposevehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addition-al fuel as soon as possible after the



364

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-mate amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-

tion 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented bya low fuel warning light, which will illumi-nate when the fuel tank is near empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gaugepointer may fluctuate or the low fuelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual due to the movement of fuel in thetank.

The bottom segment will flash as the fuellevel approaching empty.

Trip computer

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system thatdisplays information related to driving,

including odometer, tripmeter, distanceto empty, average fuel consumption,average speed, driving time on the dis-play when the ignition switch is in the ONposition. All stored driving information(except odometer and distance to empty)is reset if the battery is disconnected.

al fuel as soon as possible after the

warning light comes on or when thegauge indicator comes close to theE level.

CAUTIONAvoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

OLM049058 OLM049059


The odometer is always displayed untilthe display is turned off.

Push the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-ond to select tripmeter, distance toempty, average fuel consumption, aver-age speed, driving time and function as



4 37

g p , g

follows:

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to

determine when periodic maintenanceshould be performed.

Tripmeter

This mode indicates the distance of indi-vidual trips selected since the last trip-meter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to999.9 miles (0.0 to 999.9 km).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1second, when the tripmeter is being dis-played, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

OLM049060N OLM049061N

Tripmeter

Driving time

Distance to empty

Average fuel consumption

Average speed


✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-ed, the “Distance to empty” functionmay not operate correctly.The trip computer may not register



384

Distance to empty

This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty based on the current fuelin the fuel tank and the amount of fuel

delivered to the engine. When theremaining distance is below 30 miles (50km), “----” will be displayed and the dis-tance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter’s working range is from 30 to990 miles (50 to 990 km).

Average fuel consumption

This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel used andthe distance since the last average con-

sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-culated from the fuel consumption input.For an accurate calculation, drive morethan 0.03 miles (50 m).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1second, when the average fuel consump-tion is being displayed, clears the averagefuel consumption to zero (--.-).

p p y g

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.• The fuel consumption and distance to

empty values may vary significantlybased on driving conditions, drivinghabits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-mate of the available driving distance.This value may differ from the actualdriving distance available.

OLM049062N OLM049064N


Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine).Any light that does not illuminateshould be checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.



4 39

Average speed

This mode calculates the average speedof the vehicle since the last averagespeed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, theaverage speed is calculated while theengine is running.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1second, when the average speed isbeing displayed, clears the averagespeed to zero (---).

Driving time

This mode indicates the total time trav-eled since the last driving time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

driving time is calculated while theengine is running.

The meter’s working range is from0:00~99:59.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1second, when the driving time is beingdisplayed, clears the driving time to zero(0:00).

After starting the engine, check to makesure that all warning lights are off. If anyare still on, this indicates a situation thatneeds attention. When releasing theparking brake, the brake system warninglight should go off. The fuel warning lightwill stay on if the fuel level is low.OLM049066N OLM049067N


Active ECO system

(if equipped)

When the active ECO is operating, theECO indicator is green.


This warning light will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON posi

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light

This light illuminates if the ignition switchis turned ON and goes off in approxi-

t l 3 d if th t i t

ECO



404

CO g

For more detailed information, refer to“Active ECO” in chapter 5.

turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

This light also comes on when theSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) isnot working properly. If the AIR BAGwarning light does not come on, or con-tinuously remains on after operating forabout 6 seconds when you turned theignition switch to the ON position or start-ed the engine, or if it comes on whiledriving, have the SRS inspected by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-ing normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on,comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, this indicatesthat there may be a malfunction with theABS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized HYUNDAI dealer assoon as possible. The normal braking

system will still be operational, but with-out the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

WARNINGDon't keep watching the indicatorwhile driving. It will distract youwhile driving and cause an acci-dent that results in severe personalinjury.


Electronic brakeforce distribution(EBD) systemwarning light

If two warning lights shown illuminate atthe same time while driving, your vehiclemay have a malfunction with ABS and

✽ NOTICEIf the ABS warning light or EBD warn-ing light is on and stays on, thespeedometer or odometer/tripmetermay not work. Also, the EPS warninglight may illuminate and the steering

Parking brake & brake fluid warning light

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking



4 41

may have a malfunction with ABS andEBD system.

In this case, your ABS and regular brakesystem may not work normally. Have thevehicle checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

effort may increase or decrease. In thiscase, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon aspossible.

brake is applied with the ignition switch inthe START or ON position. The warninglight should go off when the parkingbrake is released while engine is run-ning.

The parking brake warning chime willsound to remind you that the parkingbrake is applied when you are drivingabove 6 mph (10 km/h). Always releasethe parking brake before you drive.

Low brake fluid level warningIf the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level in thereservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safelocation and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check thebrake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required. Then check all brakecomponents for fluid leaks.

WARNINGIf both ABS and Brake warninglights are on and stay on,your vehi-cle’s brake system will not work normally. So you may experiencean unexpected and dangerous situ-ation during sudden braking. In thiscase, avoid high speed driving andabrupt braking. Have your vehiclechecked by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer as soon as possible.


3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks arefound, the warning light remains on orthe brakes do not operate properly.Have the vehicle towed to any author-ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-tem inspection and necessary repairs.

Your vehicle is equipped with a dual diag

Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the seat beltwarning light will blink for approximately6 seconds each time you turn the ignition

Light on indicator

The indicator illuminates when the taillights or headlights are ON.



424

Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-diag-onal braking system. This means you stillhave braking on two wheels even if one ofthe brake circuits is damaged or malfunc-tions. With only one of the circuits work-ing, more than normal pedal travel andgreater pedal pressure are required tostop the car. Also, the car will not stop inas short a distance with only a portion ofthe brake system working. If the brakesfail while you are driving, shift to a lowergear for additional engine braking and

stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.To check bulb operation, check whetherthe parking brake and brake fluid warninglight illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

6 seconds each time you turn the ignitionswitch ON, regardless of belt fastening.For details, refer to the seat belt on chap-ter 3.

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instru-ment panel show the direction indicated

by the turn signals. If the arrow comes onbut does not blink, blinks more rapidlythan normal, or does not illuminate at all,a malfunction in the turn signal system isindicated. Your dealer should be consult-ed for repairs.

This indicator also blinks when the haz-ard warning switch is turned on.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-lights are on and in the high beam posi-tion or when the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

Front fog light indicator

(if equipped)

The indicator illuminates when the frontfog lights are ON.

WARNINGDriving the vehicle with a warninglight on is dangerous. If the brakewarning light remains on, have the

brakes checked and repaired imme-diately by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.


Engine oil pressure

warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oilpressure is low.

Shift pattern indicator (if equipped)

The indicator displays which automatictransaxle shift position is selected.

CAUTIONIf the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is



4 43

If the warning light illuminates while driv-ing:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road andstop.

2. With the engine off, check the engineoil level. If the level is low, add oil asrequired.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, call anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Manual transaxle shift indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you which gear isdesired while driving to save fuel.

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rdgear is desired (currently the shiftlever is in the 2nd gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the3rd gear is desired (currently theshift lever is in the 4th gear).

✽ NOTICEWhen the system is not working proper-ly, up & down arrow indicator and Gearare not displayed.

light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on,then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, there is a serious malfunction.

If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. If the light stays on with the engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running, the engine should be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer before the car is driven again.

CAUTIONIf the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated, severe damage could result.


Charging system warning light

This warning light indicates a malfunctionof either the generator or electricalcharging system.

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely with the igni-

Malfunction indicator (MIL) (check engine light)

This indicator light is part of the EngineControl System which monitors various



444

charging system.

If the warning light comes on while thevehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2. With the engine off, check the genera-tor drive belt for looseness or break-age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-lem exists somewhere in the electricalcharging system. Have an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer correct the problem

as soon as possible.

tion switch in any position.

Tailgate open warning light

This warning light illuminates when thetailgate is not closed securely with theignition switch in any position.

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tankis nearly empty. When it comes on, youshould add fuel as soon as possible.Driving with the fuel level warning light onor with the fuel level below “E” can causethe engine to misfire and damage thecatalytic converter.

emission control system components. Ifthis light illuminates while driving, it indi-cates that a potential malfunction hasbeen detected somewhere in the emis-sion control system.

This light will also illuminate when theignition switch is turned to the ON posi-tion, and will go out in a few secondsafter the engine is started. If it illuminateswhile driving, or does not illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned to the ONposition, take your vehicle to your near-est authorized HYUNDAI dealer andhave the system checked.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to bedrivable, but have the system checked byan authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.


ESC indicator (Electronic Stability Control) (if equipped)

The ESC indicator will illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned ON, butshould go off after approximately 3 sec-

DBC (Downhill brake control) indicator (if equipped)

The DBC indicator will illuminate whenthe DBC button is pressed and the sys-tem is on.

CAUTION• Prolonged driving with the

Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the emission control systems which



4 45

g pp yonds. When the ESC is on, it monitorsthe driving conditions and under normaldriving conditions, the ESC indicator willremain off. When a slippery or low trac-tion condition is encountered, the ESCwill operate, and the ESC indicator willblink to indicate the ESC is operating. Ifthe ESC system malfunctions the indica-tor illuminates and stays on. Take yourvehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI deal-er and have the system checked.

ESC OFF indicator (if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned ON,but should go off after approximately 3seconds. To switch to ESC function off,press the ESC OFF button. The ESCOFF indicator will illuminate indicating

the ESC is deactivated.

When driving down a steep hill at aspeed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the DBCwill operate and the DBC indicator willblink to indicate the DBC is operating.

If the red indicator illuminates, the DBCsystem may have malfunctioned. Takeyour vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAIdealer and have the system checked.

ycould effect drivability and/or fuel economy.

• If the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power.Have the Engine Control System inspected as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


AWD system warning light (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the AWD indicator will illu-minate and then go off in a few seconds.

AWD LOCK indicator (if equipped)

The AWD LOCK indicator light is illumi-nated when the AWD LOCK button ispushed.The purpose of this AWD LOCK

Low tire pressure indicator

The low tire pressure telltale comes onfor 3 seconds after the ignition switch isturned to the "ON" position.



464

g

If the AWD system warning lightilluminates, this indicates that there is amalfunction in the AWD system. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon aspossible.

pus ed e pu pose o t s OCmode is to increase the drive powerwhen driving on wet pavement, snow-covered roads and/or off-road. The AWDLOCK indicator light is turned off bypushing the button again.

The low tire pressure telltale illuminateswhen one or more of your tires is signifi-cantly underinflated.

The low tire pressure telltale will illumi-nate after it blinks for approximately oneminute when there is a problem with theTire Pressure Monitoring System.

If this occurs, have the system checkedby an authorized HYUNDAI dealer assoon as possible.

For details, refer to the TPMS on section 6.

CAUTIONDo not use AWD LOCK mode on dry paved roads or highway, it can cause noise, vibration or damage of

AWD related parts.

WARNING - Safe stopping• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator, apply the brakesgradually and with light force,and slowly move to a safe posi-tion off the road.


Engine coolant temperature warning light (if equipped)

The warning light illuminates if the tem-perature of the engine coolant is above248±5.4°F (120±3°C).

Cruise indicator CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the

Key reminder warning chime

If the driver’s door is opened while theignition key is left in the ignition switch(ACC or LOCK position), the keyreminder warning chime will sound. Thisis to prevent you from locking your keysin the vehicle.The chime sounds until the

CRUISE



4 47

Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “Overheating” in section 6.

✽ NOTICEIf the engine coolant temperature warn-ing light illuminates, it indicates over-heating that may damage the engine.

Electric power steering

(EPS) system warning light

This indicator light comes on after theignition key is turned to the ON positionand then it will go out after the engine isstarted.

This light also comes on when the EPShas some troubles. If it comes on whiledriving, have your vehicle inspected byan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

cruise control system is enabled.The cruise indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated when thecruise control ON-OFF button on thesteering wheel is pushed.

The indicator light turns off when thecruise control ON-OFF button is pushedagain. For more information about theuse of cruise control, refer to “Cruisecontrol system” in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise function switch (SET- or RES+) isON.

The cruise SET indicator light in theinstrument cluster is illuminated whenthe cruise control switch (SET- or RES+)is pushed. The cruise SET indicator light

does not illuminate when the cruise con-trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or thesystem is disengaged.

key is removed from the ignition switch orthe driver’s door is closed.

EPS SET


REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsi-bility of the driver to alwayscheck the inside/outside rearviewmirror and the area behind the

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER



484

The rearview camera will activate whenthe back-up light is ON with the ignitionswitch ON and the shift lever in the R(Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental system

that shows behind the vehicle through thenavigation display while backing-up.

The hazard warning flasher should beused whenever you find it necessary tostop the car in a hazardous location.When you must make such an emer-gency stop, always pull off the road as faras possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned onby pushing in the hazard switch. Thiscauses all turn signal lights to blink. Thehazard warning lights will operate eventhough the key is not in the ignitionswitch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off,push the switch a second time.

vehicle before and while backingup.

• Always keep the camera lensclean. If lens is covered with for-eign matter, the camera may notoperate normally. OLM049084

OLM049081

OLM049082

Rear view display


Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to pre-vent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the parking lights when thedriver removes the ignition key andopens the driver-side door (in that

d )

Headlight escort function(if equipped)

The headlights (and/or taillights) remainon for approximately 20 minutes after theignition key is removed or turned to theACC or LOCK position. However, if thedriver’s door is opened and closed, theh dli h d ff f 30

LIGHTING

CAUTIONIf the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver’s door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlight escort function does not turn

ff i ll Th f I



4 49

order).• With this feature, the parking lights will

be turned off automatically if the driverparks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed, per-form the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ONagain using the light switch on the

steering column.

headlights are turned off after 30 sec-onds.

The headlights can be turned off bypressing the lock button on the transmit-ter twice or turning off the light switchfrom the headlight or Auto light position.

off automatically. Therefore, It causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.


Headlight welcome function

When the headlight switch is in the ONposition or in the AUTO position and alldoors (and tailgate) are closed andlocked, if you press the door unlock but-ton on the transmitter, the headlight willcome on for about 15 seconds.



504

If the headlight switch is in the AUTOposition, the function can only operate atnight.

To turn off the headlight immediately, doone of the following:

• Press the door lock button.

• Press the unlock button twice within 4seconds.

• Press the unlock button once moreafter 4 seconds.

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and aParking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the

end of the control lever to one of the fol-lowing positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parkinglight position (1st position), the tail, posi-tion, license and instrument panel lights

will turn ON.

OAM049041OXM049110


CAUTION• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better auto-light system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using a

window cleaner The cleaner may



4 51

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlightposition (2nd position), the head, tail,position, license and instrument panel

lights will turn ON.

✽ NOTICEThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition to turn on the headlights.

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO lightposition, the taillights and headlights willbe turn ON or OFF automatically

depending on the amount of light outsidethe vehicle.

OAM049042 OLM049328

window cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.




524

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull it backfor low beams.

The high beam indicator will light whenthe headlight high beams are switched on.

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights on for aprolonged time while the engine is notrunning.

To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the normal(low beam) position when released. Theheadlight switch does not need to be onto use this flashing feature.

Turn signals and lane change sig-nals

The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn on the

turn signals, move the lever up or down(A). The green arrow indicators on theinstrument panel indicate which turn sig-nal is operating. They will self-cancelafter a turn is completed. If the indicatorcontinues to flash after a turn, manuallyreturn the lever to the OFF position.

OAM049044 OAM049043 OAM049045

WARNINGDo not use high beam when thereare other vehicles. Using high

beam could obstruct the other dri-ver's vision.


To signal a lane change, move the turnsignal lever slightly and hold it in position(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-tion when released.

If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one of theturn signal bulbs may be burned out and

will require replacement



4 53

will require replacement.

One-touch lane change function (if equipped)

To activate an one-touch lane changefunction, move the turn signal leverslightly for less than 0.5 second and thenrelease it. The lane change signals willblink 3 times.

✽NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormally quick

or slow, a bulb may be burned out orhave a poor electrical connection in thecircuit.

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improvedvisibility when visibility is poor due to fog,rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn

on when fog light switch (1) is turned toON after the headlights (low beam) areturned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the switchto OFF.

OAM049046

CAUTIONWhen in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor.


A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer(if equipped)



544

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

D : Rear wiper/washer control

· ON – Continuous wipe

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

* : if equipped

OAM049100N/OAM049048N


✽ NOTICEIf there is heavy accumulation of snowor ice on the windshield, defrost thewindshield for about 10 minutes, oruntil the snow and/or ice is removedbefore using the windshield wipers toensure proper operation.



4 55

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignitionswitch is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, move

the lever to this (MIST) positionand release it. The wipers willoperate continuously if the lever isheld in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT : Wiper operates intermittently atthe same wiping intervals. Use thismode in a light rain or mist. To varythe speed setting, turn the speedcontrol knob(1).

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

✽ NOTICE• When you operate the wipers, if your

vehicle has a problem in any part of the wiper operation system, the wipermay operate in the LO mode regard-less of the wiper switch position. Inthis case, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized HYUNDAI dealer assoon as possible.

• When the ignition key is removed, thewiper blade sometimes may moveslightly for reducing the deteriorationof the windshield wipers.

Windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever gentlytoward you to spray washer fluid on thewindshield and to run the wipers 1-3

cycles.Use this function when the windshield isdirty.

The spray and wiper operation will con-tinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check thewasher fluid level. If the fluid level is notsufficient, you will need to add appropri-ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluidto the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the

front of the engine compartment on thepassenger side.

OAM049101N OAM049102N


CAUTIONTo prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.



564

Rear window wiper and washerswitch

The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of the wiperand washer switch lever. Turn the switchto the desired position to operate the rearwiper and washer.

ON - Normal wiper operation

INT - Intermittent wiper operation(if equipped)

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you to sprayrear washer fluid and to run the rearwipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiperoperation will continue until you releasethe lever.

WARNINGDo not use the washer in freezingtemperatures without first warmingthe windshield with the defrosters;the washer solution could freeze onthe windshield and obscure yourvision.

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers manually.

OAM049103N OXM049125


Also, the light (with room lamp)goes out gradually after approxi-mately 30 seconds if the door(except tailgate) is closed.However, if the ignition switch isON or all doors (except tailgate)are locked, the light will turn off

immediately.If d ( t t il t ) i

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTIONDo not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.



4 57

Automatic turn off function(if equipped)

The interior lights (Map lamp, Roomlamp, Vanity mirror lamp) automaticallyturn off after approximately 20 minuteswhen ignition switch is turned off and alldoors are closed.

If your vehicle is equipped with the theftalarm system, the interior lights automat-ically turns off approximately 5 secondsafter the system is in the armed stage.

Map lamp

Push the lens to turn the map lamp on oroff.

• ON : The l ight (with room lamp)

stays on at all times.• DOOR: The light (with room lamp)

comes on when any door(except tailgate) is openedregardless of the ignition switchposition. When doors (excepttailgate) are unlocked by thetransmitter, the light (with roomlamp) comes on for approxi-mately 30 seconds as long asany door (except tailgate) is not

opened.

yIf a door (except tailgate) isopened with the ignition switch inthe ACC or LOCK position, thelight (with room lamp) stays on forabout 20 minutes. However, if adoor (except tailgate) is openedwith the ignition switch in the ONposition, the light (with roomlamp) stays on continuously.

• OFF : The light (only map lamp) stays

off at all times.❈When the lamp is turned ON

by pressing the lens (1), thelamp does not turn off even ifthe switch (2) is in the OFFposition.

OLM049100K

WARNINGDo not use the interior lights whendriving in the dark. Accidents couldhappen because the view may beobscured by interior lights.




584

Room lamp

The room lamp operates according to themap lamp main switch position.

• ON : The light (room lamp) stays on at

all times regardless of the maplamp main switch position.

Luggage lamp (if equipped)

The light comes on or off when the tail-gate is opened or closed.

Glove box lamp

The glove box lamp comes on when theglove box is opened.

The parking lights or headlights must be

ON for the glove box lamp to function.

OLM049101 OLM049103 OLM049102


CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the conduc- tors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the

window.

DEFROSTER



4 59

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

• : The lamp will turn on if this but-ton is pressed.

• : The lamp will turn off if this but-

ton is pressed.

✽ NOTICETurn off the lamp before return the sun-visor to its original position.

✽ NOTICEIf you want to defrost and defog thefront windshield, refer to “Windshielddefrosting and defogging” in this sec-tion. Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice from therear window, while the engine is running.

OLM049105 OLM049109


To activate the rear window defroster,press the rear window defroster buttonlocated in the center facia switch panel.The indicator on the rear windowdefroster button illuminates when thedefroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on

the rear window, brush it off before oper-ating the rear defroster



604

ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after approximately 20 minutesor when the ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the defroster, press the rearwindow defroster button again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the out-

side rearview mirror defrosters, they willoperate at the same time you turn on therear window defroster.

Front windshield deicer(if equipped)

To activate the front windshield deicer,press the front windshield deicer button

located in the center facia switch panel.The indicator on the front windshielddeicer button illuminates when the deiceris ON.

The front windshield deicer automaticallyturns off after approximately 20 minutesor when the ignition switch is turned off.

To turn off the deicer, press the frontwindshield deicer button again.

OLM049104


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)



4 61

OLM049111

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Front windshield defroster button

3. MAX A/C mode button

4. Temperature control knob

5. Air conditioning button

6. Mode selection button

7. Air intake control button


Heating and air conditioning1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness ofheating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:3. Set the temperature control to the



624

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn theair conditioning system on.

OLM049120


MAX A/C-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper bodyand face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and therecirculated air position will be selected

automatically.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the air beingdirected to the windshield and side win-dow defrosters.



4 63

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-board outlets, or windshield. Six symbolsare used to represent MAX A/C, Face,Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrostair position.

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool theinside of the vehicle faster.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper bodyand face. Additionally, each outlet can becontrolled to direct the air dischargedfrom the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)

Air flow is directed towards the face andthe floor.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floorand the windshield with a small amountdirected to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.

OLM049112




644

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closedseparately using the horizontal thumb-wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left tothe maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows youto control the temperature of the air flow-ing from the ventilation system. Tochange the air temperature in the pas-

senger compartment, turn the knob tothe right position for warm and hot air orleft position for cooler air.

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

OLM049115 OLM049116OLM049114


Recirculated air position

The indicator light on thebutton illuminates when therecirculated air position isselected.

With the recirculated airposition selected, air from

the passenger compart-ment will be drawn through

✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heater in therecirculated air position (without airconditioning selected) may cause fog-ging of the windshield and side windowsand the air within the passenger com-partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the recirculated air

WARNING• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system operation in the recir-culated air position may allowhumidity to increase inside thevehicle which may fog the glass

and obscure visibility.• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the



4 65

the heating system andheated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on thebutton does not illuminateswhen the outside (fresh) airposition is selected.

With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accord-ing to the function selected.

gposition selected will result in excessive-ly dry air in the passenger compart-ment.

Do not sleep in a vehicle with theair conditioning or heating sys-tem on. It may cause seriousharm or death due to a drop in theoxygen level and/or body temper-ature.

• Continued use of the climate con-trol system operation in the recir-culated air position can causedrowsiness or sleepiness, and

loss of vehicle control. Set the airintake control to the outside(fresh) air position as much aspossible while driving.


System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.


3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed



664

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you tocontrol the fan speed of the air flowing

from the ventilation system. To changethe fan speed, turn the knob to the rightfor higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the mode selection knob to the“0” position turns off the fan.

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate).Push the button again to turn theair conditioning system off.

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.



4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the modeto the or position.

OLM049117 OLM049118


Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilationsystem, temporarily set the air intakecontrol to the recirculated air position.Be sure to return the control to thefresh air position when the irritation

has passed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driveralert and comfortable

Air conditioning

All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systemsare filled with environmentally friendlyR-134a refrigerant which does not dam-age the ozone layer.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the outside

✽ NOTICE• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the engine temperaturegauge closely while driving up hills orin heavy traffic when outside temper-atures are high. Air conditioning sys-tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blowerfan but turn the air conditioning sys-

ff if h i



4 67

alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system isdrawn in through the grilles just aheadof the windshield. Care should betaken that these are not blocked byleaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control to thefresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-tioning system, and adjust the temper-ature control to desired temperature.

air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, setthe temperature control to the extremeleft position, set the mode control tothe MAX A/C position, then set the fanspeed control to the highest speed.

tem off if the engine temperaturegauge indicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humidweather air conditioning may createwater droplets inside the vehicle.Since excessive water droplets maycause damage to electrical equipment,air conditioning should only be oper-ated with the windows closed.


Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in directsunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of thewindows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-cle by operating the air conditioningsystem

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even puddling) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operationcharacteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position providesmaximum cooling, however, continualoperation in this mode may cause the

Outside air

Recirculatedair



684

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles.This is a normal system operationcharacteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth only for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

operation in this mode may cause theair inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you mayoccasionally notice a misty air flowbecause of rapid cooling and humid airintake. This is a normal system opera-tion characteristics.

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into the vehi-cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust orother pollutants accumulate in the filterover a period of time, the air flow from theair vents may decrease, resulting inmoisture accumulation on the inside ofthe windshield even when the outside(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-pens, have the climate control air filterreplaced by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

1LDA5047

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporator core

Heater core


✽ NOTICE• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.If the car is being driven in severeconditions such as dusty or roughroads, more frequent air conditionerfilter inspections and changes are

required.• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases the system should be

Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has a negativeimpact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by an



4 69

decreases, the system should bechecked at an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽ NOTICEIt is important when servicing the airconditioning system that the correcttype and amount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to the com-pressor and abnormal system operation

may occur.

WARNINGThe air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer. Improper servicemay cause serious injury to theperson performing the service.


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. AUTO (automatic control) button

2. Driver’s temperature control knob



704

p

3. A/C display

4. Passenger’s temperature control knob

5. Dual temperature control selection button

6. OFF button

7. Front windshield defrost button

8. Air conditioning button

9. Fan speed control button

10. Air intake control button11. Mode selection button

OLM049121L


2. Set the temperature switch to thedesired temperature.

If the temperature is set to the lowestsetting (Lo), the air conditioning sys-tem will operate continuously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,select any button or switch of the fol-

lowing:• Mode selection button

• Air conditioning button



4 71

Automatic heating and air condi-tioningThe automatic climate control system iscontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.

The Full Automatic Temperature Control(FATC) system automatically controls theheating and cooling system as follows;

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicatedby AUTO on the display. The modes,fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-tioning will be controlled automaticallyby temperature setting.

• Air conditioning button

• Front windshield defroster button

• Air intake control button

• Fan speed control switch

The selected function will be controlledmanually while other functions operateautomatically.

For your convenience and to improve theeffectiveness of the climate control, usethe AUTO button and set the temperatureto 73°F (23°C).

✽ NOTICENever place anything over the sensorlocated on the instrument panel toensure better control of the heating andcooling system.

OLM049154OLM049122L


Manual heating and air conditioing

The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually by pushing buttonsor turning knob(s) other than the AUTObutton. In this case, the system workssequentially according to the order ofbuttons or knob(s) selected.

✽ NOTICEWh i b tt ( t i

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper bodyand face. Additionally, each outlet can becontrolled to direct the air dischargedfrom the outlet.

Bi L l (B D E C)



724

When pressing any button (or turningany knob) except the AUTO buttonwhile using automatic operation, thefunctions not selected will continue to becontrolled automatically.

1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;- Heating:

- Cooling:



5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.Press the AUTO button in order to convertto full automatic control of the system.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as

follows:

Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-mate control system”.

Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)

Air flow is directed towards the face andthe floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the air beingdirected to the windshield and side win-dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floorand the windshield with a small amountdirected to the side window defrosters.

OLM049123




4 73

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closedseparately using the horizontal thumb-wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left tothe maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to themaximum (HI) by turning the knob to theright extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the min-

imum (Lo) by turning the knob to the leftextremely.

When turning the knob, the temperaturewill increase or decrease by 1°F/0.5°C.When set to the lowest temperature set-ting, the air conditioning will operate con-tinuously.

OLM049124L OLM049114 OLM049125L


Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature equally

1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-tivate DUAL mode. The passengerside temperature will be set to thesame temperature as the driver side.

2. Operate the driver side temperature

control switch. The driver and passen-ger side temperature will be adjustedequally.



744

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature individually

1. Press the DUAL button to operate thedriver and passenger side temperatureindividually. Also, if the passenger side

temperature control switch is operat-ed, it will automatically change to theDUAL mode as well.

2. Operate the left temperature control toadjust the driver side temperature.Operate the right temperature controlto adjust the passenger side tempera-ture.

When the driver side temperature is setto the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo) temper-

ature setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-vated for maximum heating or cooling.

Temperature conversion

You can switch the temperature modebetween Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol-lows:

While pressing the OFF button, press theAUTO button for 3 seconds or more.

The display will change from Fahrenheit

to Centigrade, or from Centigrade toFahrenheit.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode dis-play will reset to Fahrenheit.

Outside thermometer

The current outside temperature is dis-played in 1°F (1°C) increments.The tem-perature range is between -40°F ~ 140°F(-40°C ~ 60°C).

• The outside temperature on the displaymay not change immediately.

OLM049126 OLM049127N


Recirculated air position

With the recirculated airposition selected, air fromthe passenger compart-ment will be drawn throughthe heating system andheated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

WARNING• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system operation in the recir-culated air position may allowhumidity to increase inside thevehicle which may fog the glass

and obscure visibility.• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating system



4 75

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outsideand is heated or cooledaccording to the functionselected.

✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heater in therecirculated air position (without airconditioning selected) may cause fog-ging of the windshield and side windowsand the air within the passenger com-partment may become stale.In addition, prolonged use of the air con-ditioning with the recirculated air posi-tion selected will result in excessively dryair in the passenger compartment.

OLM049128L

g g yon. It may cause serious harm ordeath due to a drop in the oxygenlevel and/or body temperature.

• Continued use of the climate con-trol system operation in the recir-culated air position can causedrowsiness or sleepiness, and lossof vehicle control. Set the air intake

control to the outside (fresh) airposition as much as possible whiledriving.




764

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by operating the fan speed controlswitch.

To change the fan speed, press ( )

the switch for higher speed, or press( ) the switch for lower speed. Toturn the fan speed control off, press thefront blower OFF button.

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the air con-ditioning system on (indicator light willilluminate).

Press the button again to turn the air

conditioning system off.

OFF mode

Press the OFF button to turn off the airclimate control system.However, you canstill operate the mode and air intake but-tons as long as the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

OLM049131OLM049129L OLM049130L


• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whiledefrosting or defogging, set the modeto the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield, rear window, out-side rear view mirrors, and all side win-dows

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windshieldheating

Do not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature of

the outside air and the windshieldcould cause the outer surface ofthe windshield to fog up, causingloss of visibility In this case set



4 77

dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hoodand air inlet in the cowl grill to improveheater and defroster efficiency and toreduce the probability of fogging up theinside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-tion.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically. If the position isselected, air conditioning will also beselected automatically.

If the air conditioning and/or outside(fresh) air position are not selected auto-matically, press the corresponding buttonmanually.

loss of visibility. In this case, setthe mode selection to the posi-tion and fan speed control to thelower speed.

OLM049132




784

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-tion.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hotposition.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-

tioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-tion.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air conditioning will turn onaccording to the detected ambient tem-perature and outside (fresh) air posi-tion will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)air position are not selected automatical-ly, adjust the corresponding button man-ually. If the position is selected,lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher

fan speed.

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-tion.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot(HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).4. The air conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambienttemperature and outside (fresh) airposition will be selected automatically.

OLM049134 OLM049135OLM049133


Defogging logic

To reduce the possibility of fogging upthe inside of the windshield, the air intakeor air conditioning are controlled auto-matically according to certain conditionssuch as or position. To cancel orreturn to the defogging logic, perform the

following steps:



4 79

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

2. Select the defrost position pressingthe defrost button ( ).

3. Press the air intake control button atleast 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator light in the air intake controlbutton will blink 3 times with 0.5 secondof interval. It indicates that the defogginglogic is canceled or returned to the pro-grammed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the system resets to the pre-programmed defogging logic.

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

2. Select the defroster position pressingthe defroster button ( ).

3. While pressing the air conditioningbutton (A/C), press the air intake con-trol button at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the system resets to the pre-

programmed defogging logic.

OLM049137NOLM049136N


These compartments can be used tostore small items required by the driveror passengers.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.• Always keep the storage com-

partment covers closed while

U

UN

NL

LO

OC

CK

K

L

LO

OC

CK

K



804

Center console storageThese compartments can be used tostore small items required by the driveror front passenger.

To open the center console storage pull

up the lever.

Glove box

The glove box can be locked andunlocked with a master key.

To open the glove box, pull the handleand the glove box will automatically

open. Close the glove box after use.WARNING - FlammablematerialsDo not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or other flamma-ble/explosive materials in the vehi-cle. These items may catch fireand/or explode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

pdriving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot close securely.

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.

OLM049151 OLM049152

CAUTIONDo not keep food in the glove box for a long time.


WARNING• Do not keep objects except sun-

glass inside the sunglass holder.Such objects can be thrown fromthe holder in the event of a sud-den stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in thevehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holderwhile the vehicle is moving. The



4 81

Sunglass holder

To open the sunglass holder, press thecover and the holder will slowly open.Place your sunglasses in the compart-ment door with the lenses facing out.

Push to close.

while the vehicle is moving. Therear view mirror of the vehiclecan be blocked by an open sun-glass holder.

OLM049142


INTERIOR FEATURES

CAUTION

WARNING• Do not hold the lighter in after it

is already heated because it willoverheat.

• If the lighter does not pop outwithin 30 seconds, remove it to

prevent overheating.



824

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-tion switch must be in the ACC positionor the ON position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the

way into its socket. When the elementhas heated, the lighter will pop out to the“ready” position.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin. This can damage the heating elementand create a fire hazard.

If it is necessary to replace the cigarettelighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAIreplacement or its approved equivalent.

Ashtray (if equipped)To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.

CAUTIONOnly a genuine HYUNDAI lighter should be used in the cigarette lighter socket. The use of plug-in accessories (shavers, hand-held vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure.

OLM049144

WARNING - Ashtray use• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtraysas waste receptacles.

• Putting lit cigarettes or matchesin an ashtray with other com-bustible materials may cause afire.

OLM049145


Cup holder

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion. If the hotliquid spills, you burn yourself.

Such a burn to the driver couldlead to loss of control of the vehi-cle.

• To reduce the risk of personal OLM049146

■ Front



4 83

Cups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.

To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use the sunvisor for the side window,

pull it downward, unsnap it from thebracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

Adjust the sunvisor extension forward orbackward (3).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and slide the mirror cover (4).

The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of sudden stopor collision, do not place uncov-ered or unsecured bottles, glass-es, cans, etc., in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion.

OLM049146

OLM049147

■ Rear (if equipped)OLM049207

WARNINGKeep cans or bottles out of directsun light and do not put them in avehicle that is heated up. It mayexplode.


CAUTION - Vanity mirrorlamp (if equipped)

If you use the vanity mirror lamp,turn off the lamp before return the sunvisor to its original position. It could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.

OLM049150

■ Front

CAUTION• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use.Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the bat-

tery to discharge.• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A in elec- t i it

WARNING



844

Power outlet

The power outlet is designed to providepower for mobile telephones or otherdevices designed to operate with vehicleelectrical systems. The devices shoulddraw less than 10 amps with the engine

running.

OLM049153

■ Rear (if equipped)tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

WARNINGDo not put a finger or a foreign ele-ment (pin, etc.) into a power outletand do not touch with a wet hand.You may get an electric shock.

WARNINGFor your safety, do not obstruct yourvision when using the sunvisor.


Setup the clock

With audio off

1. Press the [SETUP] button until theclock of the display blinks.

2. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)and press it.

With audio on1. Press the [SETUP] button.

2. Select the [CLOCK] mode by turningthe knob(1) and press it

■ Type A ■ Type B



4 85

Digital clock (if equipped)

Whenever the battery terminals or relat-ed fuses are disconnected, you mustreset the time.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position, the clock buttons operate asfollows:

the knob(1) and press it.

3. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)and press it. Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)

When using a floor mat on the front floorcarpet, make sure it attaches to the floormat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keepsthe floor mat from sliding forward.

OLM049208

WARNINGDo not adjust the clock while driv-ing. You may lose your steeringcontrol and cause severe personalinjury or accidents.

OXM049228


If necessary, contact your authorizedHYUNDAI dealer to obtain a luggage net.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky

objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNINGThe following must be observedwhen installing ANY floor mat tothe vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats aresecurely attached to the vehicle'sfloor mat anchor(s) before drivingthe vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat thatcannot be firmly attached to the

hi l ' fl t h



864

Luggage net (holder)(if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the cargoarea, you can use the holders located inthe cargo area to attach the luggage net.

It can be mounted as a flat net by usingholders (1) and (2), or as an envelop netby using holders (2) and (3).

WARNINGAvoid eye injury. DO NOT over-stretch the luggage net, ALWAYSkeep your face and body out of theluggage net’s recoil path. DO NOTuse the luggage net when the straphas visible signs of wear or dam-age.

OLM049202vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top ofone another (e.g. all-weather rub-ber mat on top of a carpeted floormat). Only a single floor matshould be installed in each posi-tion.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was man-ufactured with driver's side floormat anchors that are designed tosecurely hold the floor mat inplace. To avoid any interferencewith pedal operation, HYUNDAIrecommends that only theHYUNDAI floor mat designed foruse in your vehicle be installed.




4 87

Cargo security screen(if equipped)

Use the cargo security screen to hideitems stored in the cargo area.

To use the cargo security screen, pull thehandle backward and insert the edgesinto the slots.

When not in use, place the cargo securi-ty screen on the lower portion of thecargo area.

OLM049204 OLM049205OLM049203


CAUTION• When carrying cargo on the roof

rack, take the necessary precautions to make sure the cargo does not damage the roof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objects on the roof rack, make sure they do

not exceed the overall roof length or width.

• When you are carrying cargo on the roof rack do not operate the

EXTERIOR FEATURES

WARNING• Do not place objects on the cargo

security screen. Such objectsmay be thrown about inside thevehicle and possibly injure vehi-cle occupants during an accidentor when braking.

• Never allow anyone to ride in theluggage compartment. It isdesigned for luggage only.

• Maintain the balance of the vehi



884

Roof rack (if equipped)

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you canload cargo on top of your vehicle.

✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is equipped with apanoramic sunroof, it is not recom-mended that an aftermarket roof rack be installed.

the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof (if equipped).OLM049206

WARNING• The following specification is the

maximum weight that can be

loaded onto the roof rack.Distribute the load as evenly aspossible onto roof rack andsecure the load firmly.

Loading cargo or luggage inexcess of the specified weightlimit on the roof rack may dam-age your vehicle.

(Continued)

ROOF 220 lbs. (100 kg)RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

• Maintain the balance of the vehi-cle and locate the weight as farforward as possible.

CAUTIONSince the cargo security screen

may be damaged or malformed, do not put the luggage on it when it is used.


✽ NOTICEIf you install an aftermarket HID head-lamp, your vehicle's audio and electron-ic device may malfunction.

■ Type A ■ Type B

CAUTION Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash,remove the antenna by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it

is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception. But it could be removed

AUDIO SYSTEM

(Continued)

• The vehicle center of gravity willbe higher when items are loadedonto the roof rack. Avoid suddenstarts, braking, sharp turns,abrupt maneuvers or high speedsthat may result in loss of vehicle

control or rollover resulting in anaccident.

• Always drive slowly and turn cor-ners carefully when carryingit th f k S



4 89

AntennaRoof antenna

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna toreceive both AM and FM broadcast sig-nals. This antenna is removable. Toremove the antenna, turn it counterclock-wise. To install the antenna, turn it clock-wise.

OHM048154

when parking the vehicle or when loading cargo on the roof rack.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof rack, do not place the cargo near the antenna pole to ensure proper reception.

items on the roof rack. Severewind updrafts,caused by passingvehicles or natural causes, cancause sudden upward pressureon items loaded on the roof rack.This is especially true when car-rying large, flat items such as

wood panels or mattresses. Thiscould cause the items to fall offthe roof rack and cause damageto your vehicle or others aroundyou.

• To prevent damage or loss ofcargo while driving, check fre-quently before or while driving tomake sure the items on the roofrack are securely fastened.


MODE (1)

Press the button to change audio source.

- FM(1~2)➟AM➟SAT(1~3)➟CD➟USBAUX(iPod) FM...

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

The SEEK/PRESET button has different

functions based on the system mode.For the following functions the buttonshould be pressed for 0.8 second ormore.

CD/USB/iPod mode

It will function as TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

VOLUME (VOL / ) (3)

Push the lever upward ( ) to increasethe volume.

• Push the lever downward ( ) to decreasethe volume.

MUTE (4)

1

3

2

4



904

Steering wheel audio control(if equipped)

The steering wheel may incorporateaudio control buttons. These buttons areinstalled to promote safe driving.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK selectbutton.

CD/USB/iPod mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressedfor less than 0.8 second, it will work asfollows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATIONbuttons.

• Press the button to mute the sound

• Press the button to turn off the micro-phone during a telephone call.

Detailed information for audio controlbuttons are described in the followingpages in this section.

CAUTIONDo not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.


AM radio receptionFM radio reception



4 91

Aux, USB and iPod port(if equipped)

If your vehicle has an aux and/orUSB(universal serial bus) port or iPodport, you can use an aux port to connect

audio devices and the USB port to plugin a USB device.

Both ports are used together with theaccessory iPod cable to connect an iPod.

✽ NOTICEWhen using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noise mayoccur during playback. If this happens,use the power source of the portableaudio device.

❈ iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by theradio antenna on your vehicle.This signal

is then received by the radio and sent toyour vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear.Thiscan be due to factors such as the dis-tance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the pres-

ence of buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broadcasts.This is because AM radio waves aretransmitted at low frequencies. Theselong, low frequency radio waves can fol-low the curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight out into the atmos-phere. In addition, they curve aroundobstructions so that they can provide bet-ter signal coverage.

OLM049195 JBM002JBM001


FM radio station



924

FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FMbroadcasts generally begin to fade atshort distances from the station.

Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstruc-tions.These can result in certain listeningconditions which might lead you tobelieve a problem exists with your radio.The following conditions are normal anddo not indicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves awayfrom the radio station, the signal willweaken and sound will begin to fade.When this occurs, we suggest that youselect another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering nois-es to occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency maybegin to play. This is because yourradio is designed to lock onto the clear-est signal. If this occurs, select another

station with a stronger signal.• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals

being received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflect-ed signal from the same station, or bysignals from two stations with closefrequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.

JBM003 JBM005JBM004


Satellite radio receptionYou may experience receiving difficultiesreceiving XM™ satellite radio signals inthe following situations.

• If you are driving on a mountain roadwhere is the signal blocked by moun-tains.

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not meanthat something is wrong with the audioequipment. In such a case, use the cellu-lar phone at a place as far as possible

from the audio equipment.

CAUTIONWhen using a communication sys-



4 93

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a cov-

ered parking area.• If you are driving beneath the top level

of a multi-level freeway.

• If you drive under a bridge.

• If you are driving next to a tall vehi-cle(such as a truck or a bus) that blockthe signal.

• If you are driving in a valley where thesurrounding hills or peaks block thesignal from the satellite.

• If you are driving in an area with talltrees that block the signal (30 ft. / 10m

or more), for example on an road thatgoes through a dense forest.

• The signal can become weak in someareas that are not covered by the XM™repeater network.

NOTE:

There may be other unforeseen cir-cumstances leading to receptionproblems with XM™ satellite radio

signal.

WARNINGDo not use a cellular phone whiledriving. Stop at a safe location touse a cellular phone.

SATELITE2

SATELITE1

When using a communication sys tem such a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted.When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.


Care of discs

• If the temperature inside the car is toohigh, open the car windows for ventilationbefore using your car audio.

• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMAfiles without permission. Use CDs thatare created only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents such asbenzene and thinner, normal cleanersand magnetic sprays made for ana-logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-

• Keep CDs in their cases after use toprotect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may not operatenormally according to manufacturingcompanies or making and recordingmethods. In such circumstances, if youstill continue to use those CDs, they

may cause the malfunction of yourvehicle audio system.

✽ NOTICE - Playing anI ibl C



944

p gting damaged. Hold and carry CDs bythe edges or the edges of the centerhole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece ofsoft cloth before playback (wipe it fromthe center to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape or paperonto it.

• Make sure on undesirable matter otherthan CDs are inserted into the CDplayer (Do not insert more than oneCD at a time).

Incompatible CopyProtected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do notcomply with the international audio CDstandards (Red Book), may not play onyour vehicle audio. Please note that if you try to play copy protected CDs andthe CD player does not perform correct-ly the CDs maybe defective, not the CDplayer.


1. AM Selection Button

2. FM Selection Button

3. Automatic Station Seek Button

4. Power ON/OFF Button and Volume

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (USA/CANADA)



4 95

Control Knob

5. Preset Selection Button

6. SCAN Selection Button

7. DISP Button

8. SETUP Button9. TUNE & AUDIO Control Knob

❋There will be no , logo if the Bluetooth ® /XM SATELLITE feature is not supported.


Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUMEand AUDIO CONTROL

1. AM Selection ButtonPressing the [AM] button selects the AMband. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.

2. FM Selection ButtonTurns to FM mode and toggles FM1 andFM2 when the button is pressed eachtime.


• Press [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-onds to play the station saved in eachbutton.

• Press [1]~[6] button more than 0.8 sec-onds or longer to save the current sta-tion to the respective button with abeep.

6. SCAN Button

• When the button is pressed, it auto-matically scans the radio stations

8. SETUP Button

Press this Button to enter SETUP mode,If no action is taken for 8 seconds, it willreturn to previous mode.

In “SETUP” mode, rotate the TUNE knobto move the cursor between items, andpush the TUNE knob to select.

• SCROLL

Select whether long file names arescrolled continuously (“ON”) or just once(“OFF”).



964


• When the [SEEK ] is pressed, it willautomatically tune to the next lowerstation.

• When the [SEEK ] is pressed, it willautomatically tune to the next higherstation.

4. Power ON/OFF Button & VolumeControl Knob

• Turns the audio system on/off whenthe ignition switch is on ACC or ON.

• If the knob is turned clockwise/counter-clockwise, the volume will increase /decrease.

a ca y sca s e ad o s a o supwards.

• The SCAN feature steps through eachstation, starting from the initial station,for ten seconds.

• Press the [SCAN] button again to stopthe scan feature and to listen to the

currently selected channel.

7. DISP Button

Turn the LCD Display & Backlight on/offwhen [DISP] button press.

( )

• SDVC

Select this item to turn the SDVC(SpeedDependent Volume Control) feature ONor OFF. If it is turned ON, volume level isadjusted automatically according to the

vehicle speed.

• P.BASS (PowerBass)

This function creates virtual soundeffects and allows adjustments to theBASS level.

HIGH ➟ MID ➟ LOW ➟ OFF

• XM

Select default display of XM mode.

“Category/Channel name” or “Artist/SongTitle” can be selected.


• PHONE (if available)

Select this item to enter BLUETOOTH ®

setup mode. Refer to “BLUETOOTHPHONE OPERATION” section fordetailed information.

• Adjusting the Clock

Press the [SETUP] button. Use the vol-ume controller to adjust the clock in thefollowing order: CLOCK • ENTER • hour orminute.

Adjust the hour and press the [ENTER]b tt t t U th th d t

9. TUNE Knob & Audio ControlKnob

• Rotate the knob clockwise or counter-clock wise to increase or decrease fromcurrent frequency.

(AM 10kHz, FM 200kHz)

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selectedis shown on the display. After selectingeach mode, rotate the Audio control knobclockwise or counterclockwise.

• FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated). Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

• BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

right speaker sound (left speaker soundill b tt t d) Wh th t l



4 97

button to set. Use the same method to

adjust the minute and press the [ENTER]button to complete and exit from clockadjustment mode.

Pressing the [SETUP] button while inPOWER OFF screen will allow the user

to make immediately adjustments to theclock.

• BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• MIDDLE ControlTo increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, while to decrease the MID-DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counter clockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).


CD (USA/CANADA)

1. CD Loading Slot

2. CD Eject Button

3. CD Selection Button


5. RANDOM play Button



984


6. REPEAT Button

7. CD Indicator

8. SCAN Play Button

9. INFO Button

10. FOLDER Moving Button

11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button


Using CD Player

1. CD Loading Slot

Insert a CD label side up and gently pushin while ignition switch is on ACC or ON.The audio automatically switches to CDmode and begins to play the CD. If the

audio was turned off, audio power willautomatically turned on as the CD isinserted.

- This audio only recognizes 12cm-size, CD-DA(Audio CD) or ISO data-CD (MP3 CD).

If there is no CD, then the message "NoCD" will become displayed on the LCDfor 3 seconds and returns to the previousmode.

4. Track Selection Button• Press [TRACK ] button for less than

0.8 seconds to play from the beginning

of current song.• Press [TRACK ] button for less than

0.8 seconds and press again within 1seconds to play the previous song.

P [TRACK ] b f 0 8

• To cancel RANDOM Play, press thisbutton again.

6. REPEAT Button

• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-onds to repeat current song.

• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to repeat all songs in currentfolder.

• To cancel REPEAT, press this buttonagain.



4 99

- If UDF data-CD or non-CD(e.g. DVD) isinserted, "Reading Error" message willbe displayed and the disc will be ejected.

2. CD Eject Button

• Press [ ] button to eject the CD. Thisbutton works regardless of ignitionswitch status.

3. CD Selection Button

If there is a CD in the CD DECK it switch-es to CD mode.

• Press [TRACK ] button for 0.8 sec-onds or longer to initiate reverse direc-tion high speed sound search of cur-rent song.

• Press [TRACK ] button for less than0.8 seconds to play the next song.

• Press [TRACK ] button for 0.8 sec-onds or longer to initiate forward direc-tion high speed sound search of cur-rent song.

5. RANDOM Play Button

• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-onds to play songs randomly in currentfolder.

• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to play songs randomly in entireCD.

7. CD Indicator

When car ignition switch is ACC or ONand if the CD is loaded, this indicator islit. If the CD is ejected, the light is turnedoff.

8. SCAN Play Button

Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds.To cancel SCAN Play, press this buttonagain.

9. INFO Button

Displaces the information of the currentsong.

- Audio CD : Disc Title/Artist, Track Title

/Artist, Total Tracks.

CAUTION

Do not insert a CD if CD indicator is lit.


- MP3 CD : File Name, Title, Artist,Album, Folder, Total Files (Not displayedif the information is unavailable on theCD or file.)


• Press [FOLDER ] button to move tochild folder of the current folder anddisplay the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed. It will play the firstsong in the folder.

P [FOLDER ] b

NOTE:

Order of playing files(folders) :

2.Folder playing order :

❋ If no song file is contained in thefolder, that folder is not displayed.



1004

• Press [FOLDER ] button to move to

parent folder of the current folder and

display the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed.

11. SEARCH Knob & ENTERButton

• Turn this knob clockwise to browsesongs after current song, or counter-clockwise to browse songs before cur-rent song. To play the displayed song,press the knob.

• Pressing this knob without turningenters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.

1. Song playing order : to sequen-tially.


CAUTION IN USINGUSB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.

• If you start the engine when the USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.)

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of the external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB device is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,then the device will not be recognized.

• Use only a USB device formatted

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external USB device during playback in USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction.Therefore, disconnect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g,Radio, XM or CD)

• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device there is a dif-



4 101

• If the engine is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not work.

• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or dis- connecting the external USB device.

(Continued)

• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be recognizable.

• Make sure the USB connection

terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short period of time, it may break the device.

• You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnect- ing a USB device.

(Continued)

stored in the device, there is a dif ference in the time taken for recognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music files.

• Use of USB accessories such as rechargers or heaters using USB I/F may lower performance or cause trouble.

• If you use devices such as a USB hub purchased separately, the vehicle’s audio system may not recognize the USB device. In that case, connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.

(Continued)


(Continued)

• If the USB device is divided by logical drives,only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/ Cellular phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable.

• Some USB flash memory readers

(Continued)

• Please avoid using USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please make certain only to use plug type connector products as

shown below.



1024

• Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizable.• The data in the USB memory may

be lost while using this audio.Always back up important data on a personal storage device.

(Continued)


AUX/USB (USA/CANADA)

1. AUX/USB Selection Button

2. TRACK Selection Button

3. RANDOM Playback Button

4. REPEAT Selection Button



4 103


6. INFO Button





Using USB device

1. AUX/USB Selection Button

If the auxiliary device is connected, itswitches to AUX or USB mode to play thesound from the auxiliary player.

If there is no auxiliary device, then the

message "No Media" will become dis-played on the LCD for 3 seconds andreturns to previous mode.


3. RANDOM Playback Button• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds to play songs randomly in currentfolder.

• Press this button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to play songs randomly in entireUSB device.

• To cancel RANDOM play, press thisbutton again.

4. REPEAT Button

• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

➟ TITLE ➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟ FOLDER➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟

FILE NAME ➟… (Displays no informa-tion if the file has no song information.)



child folder of the current folder anddisplay the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed. It will play the firstsong in the folder.

P [FOLDER ] b tt t t



1044

• Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 seconds to play from thebeginning of the current song.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-onds and press it again within 1 sec-

ond to move to and play the previoussong.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to play the song in reversedirection in fast speed.

• Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 seconds to move to the nextsong. Press the button for 0.8 secondsor longer to play the song in forwarddirection in fast speed.

onds to repeat current song.

• Press this button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to repeat all songs in currentfolder.

• To cancel REPEAT, press this button

again.


Plays each song in the USB device for 10seconds.

To cancel SCAN Play, press this buttonagain.

6. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of FILE NAME


parent folder display the first song in

the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed.


• Turn this knob clockwise to browsesongs after current song, or counterclockwise to browse songs before cur-rent song. To play the displayed song,press the knob.

• Pressing this knob without turningenters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.


✽ NOTICE FOR USING THEIPOD ® DEVICE

• Some iPod models might not sup-port the communication protocoland the files will not be played.Supported iPod models:- iPod Mini- iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic)

generation- iPod Nano 1st~4th generation- iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation

• The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod can be different

CAUTION IN USING THEIPOD ® DEVICE

• The HYUNDAI iPod Power Cable is needed in order to operate iPod with the audio buttons on the audio system.The USB cable provided by Apple may cause mal-

function and should not be used for HYUNDAI vehicles.

❋ The HYUNDAI iPod Power Cable may be purchased through your HYUNDAI Dealership.

• When connecting iPod with the

(Continued)

• When the iPod cable is connected, the system can be switched to AUX mode even without iPod device and may cause noise.Disconnect the iPod cable when you are not using the iPod device.

• When not using iPod with car audio, detach the iPod cable from iPod. Otherwise, iPod may remain in accessory mode, and may not work properly.



4 105

from the order searched in theaudio system.

• If the iPod disabled due to its ownmalfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:Refer to iPod manual)

• An iPod may not operate normally

on low battery.• Some iPod devices, such as the

iPhone, can be connected throughthe Bluetooth® interface. The devicemust have audio Bluetooth® capa-bility (such as for stereo headphoneBluetooth®). The device can play,but it will not be controlled by theaudio system.

• When connecting iPod with the iPod Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket completely. If not inserted completely, communications between iPod and audio may be interrupted.

• When adjusting the sound effects of the iPod and the audio system,the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod when adjusting the audio system’s volume,and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod.

(Continued)


1. iPod Selection Button


3. REPEAT Selection Button


5 INFO B tt

iPod ® (USA/CANADA)

❋ iPod ® is a trademark of Apple, Inc.



1064

5. INFO Button

6. CATEGORY Selection Button




Using iPod ®

1. iPod Selection Button

If iPod is connected, it switches to theiPod mode from the previous mode toplay the song files stored in the iPod.

If there is no iPod connected, then it dis-

plays the message "No Media" for 3 sec-onds and returns to the previous mode.


• Press the [TRACK ] button for lessh 0 8 d l f h

3. REPEAT Button

Repeats the song currently played.


• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-onds to shuffle order of all songs incurrent category. (Song Random)

• Press this button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to shuffle order of albums in cur-rent category. (Album Random)

• To cancel RANDOM Play, press thisbutton again.


When you rotate the knob clockwise, itwill display the songs (category) aheadof the song currently played (category inthe same level).

Also, when you rotate the knob counter-clockwise, it will display the songs (cate-

gory) before the song currently played(category in the same level).

To listen to the song displayed in thesong category, press the button to skip toand play the selected song.

P i th b tt h th BASS



4 107

than 0.8 seconds to play from thebeginning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-onds and press it again within 1 sec-ond to move to and play the previous

track.Press the button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to play the song in reversedirection in fast speed.

• Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 seconds to move to the nexttrack.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds orlonger to play the song in forward direc-tion in fast speed.

5. INFO ButtonDisplays the information of the file cur-rently played in the order of TITLE ➟

ARTIST ➟ ALBUM➟ NORMAL DISPLAY➟

TITLE➟

... (Displays no information ifthe file has no song information.)

6. CATEGORY Selection Button

Moves to the upper category from cur-rently played category of the iPod.

To move to (play) the category (song)displayed, press TUNE/ENTER knob.

You will be able to search through thelower category of the selected category.

The order of iPod’s category is SONG,ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and iPod.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selectedis shown on the display. After selectingeach mode, rotate the Audio control knobclockwise or counterclockwise.


XM SATELLITE RADIO (USA/CANADA)

1. SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button

2. Channel Selection Button




1084



5. INFO Selection Button

6. CAT/FOLDER Button

7. Manual Channel Selection Button


Using XM Satellite Radio

Your vehicle is equipped with 3 monthscomplimentary period of XM SatelliteRadio so you have access to over 130channels of music, information, andentertainment programming.

1. XM Selection Button

Turns to XM Satellite Radio Mode. XMmode toggles in order to XM1➟XM2➟XM3➟XM1... when the button is pressedeach time.

3. Preset Selection ButtonPush [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-onds to play the channel saved in eachbutton. Push Preset button for 0.8 sec-onds or longer to save current channel tothe respective button with a beep.


Press to hear a brief sampling of allchannel. To cancel the scan mode, press

the button once again.

5. INFO Button

6. CATEGORY Search Button

• Push [FOLDER ] button to searchprevious category.

• Push [CAT ] button to search nextcategory. To listen to the displayed cat-egory, press the TUNE/SETUP button.To scan channel in displayed category,press the scan button.To search chan-

nel in displayed category, press seekbuttons or turn the tune button clock-wise/counterclockwise.(CATEGORYicon is will be turned on in Categorymode)



4 109

2. Channel Selection Button

• Push [TRACK ] button for less than0.8 seconds to select previous channel.

• Push [TRACK ] button for 0.8 sec-onds or longer to continuously move to

previous channel.• Push [SEEK ] button for less than

0.8 seconds to select next channel.

• Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 sec-onds or longer to continuously move tonext channel.

• Radio ID : Seek or Tune to XM channel0 to display the Radio ID.

Displays the information of the currentchannel in the order of Artist/Song title➟Category/Channel name➟Current PlayChannel➟Artist/Song title➟Category/ Channel name... when the button is

pressed each time.If can not display the whole text informa-tion, rotate the tune button to see thenext page.

7. Manual Channel Selection ButtonWhile listening to XM broadcast, rotatethis control to the right or left to searchother channels while listening to current

channel. (Turn to the r ight to searchhigh-er channels and left, lower channels)


CAUTION IN USINGBLUETOOTH ® CELLULARPHONE

• Do not use a cellular phone or perform Bluetooth ® settings (e.g.pairing a phone) while driving.

• Some Bluetooth ® -enabled phones

may not be recognized by the system or fully compatible with the system.

• Before using Bluetooth ® related features of the audio system,refer your phone’s User’s Manual

(continued)

• Do not place the phone near or inside metallic objects, otherwise communications with Bluetooth ®

system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.

• While a phone is connected through Bluetooth ® your phone

may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth ® -related operations.

• Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference noise or malfunction to audio



1104

y pfor phone-side Bluetooth ® operations.

• The phone must be paired to the audio system to use Bluetooth ®

related features.

• You will not be able to use the hands-free feature when your phone (in the car) is outside of the cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a mountainous area, etc.).

• If the cellular phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

(Continued)

noise or malfunction to audio system. In this case, store the device in a different location may resolve the situation.


BLUETOOTH ® PHONE OPERATION(if equipped)

■ General Features• This audio system supports Bluetooth ®

hands-free and stereo-headset fea-tures.

- HANDS-FREE feature: Making orreceiving calls wirelessly throughvoice recognition.

- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing

music from cellular phones (that sup-ports A2DP feature) wirelessly.

• Voice recognition engine of theBluetooth ® system supports 3 types oflanguages:

English

■ Bluetooth ® Language SettingThe system language can be changed bythe following steps:

1. Power on the audio system with thevolume set to an audible level.

2. Press and hold button on thesteering wheel until the audio displays“Please Wait”.

- The Bluetooth ® system will reply incurrently selected language that it ischanging to the next language.

- System language cycles between English,Canadian French and US Spanish.

Press and hold the button on the

12

345



4 111

1. button :Raises or lowers speak-er volume.

2. : Mute the microphone during

a call.3. button :Activates voice recognition.

4. button : Places and transfers calls.

5. button :Ends calls or cancels func-tions.

■What is Bluetooth ® ?Bluetooth ® is a wireless technology thatallows multiple devices to be connectedin a short range, low-powered deviceslike hands-free, stereo headset, wireless

remocon, etc.For more information, visit theBluetooth ® website at www.Bluetooth.com

g

Canadian French

US Spanish

✽ NOTICE

• The phone must be paired to the sys-tem before using Bluetooth® features.

• Only one selected (linked) cellularphonecan be used with the system at a time.

• Some phones are not fully compatiblewith this system.

• The Bluetooth® word mark and logosare registered trademarks owned byBluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Hyundai is underlicense. ABluetooth enabled cell phone

is required to use Bluetooth®

wirelesstechnology.

- Press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for over 10 seconds.

3. When completed, the audio displayreturns to normal.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the next lan-

guage selection.

NOTE:

The phone needs to be paired againafter changing system language.

- Avoid resting your thumb or fingeron the button as the languagecould unintentionally change.

MUTE

VOLUME


■ Receiving a Phone CallWhen receiving a phone call, a ringtoneis audible from speakers and the audiosystem changes into telephone mode.

When receiving a phone call, “Incomingcall” message and incoming phone num-ber (if available) are displayed on theaudio.

• To Answer a Call:

- Press button on the steeringwheel.

• To Reject a Call:

- Press button on the steering

■ Talking on the PhoneWhen talking on the phone, “Active Call”message and the other party’s phonenumber (if available) are displayed on theaudio.

• To Finish a Call

- Press button on the steering wheel.

✽ NOTICEIn the following situations, you or theother party may have difficulty hearingeach other:1. Speaking at the same time, your voice

■ Bluetooth ® Audio Music Streaming

The audio system supports Bluetooth ®

A2DP (Audio Advanced DistributionProfile) and AVRCP (Audio VideoRemote Control Profile) technologies.

Both profiles provide steaming of musicvia compatible “PAIRED” Bluetooth ®

Cellular phone.

To stream music from the Bluetooth ® cel-lular phone, play your music files on yourcellular phone according to your cellularphone user’s manual and press the

, button on the audiosystem until “MP3 play” is displayed on

CD/AUXAUX



1124

Press button on the steeringwheel.

• To Adjust Ring Volume:

- Use VOLUME buttons on the steeringwheel.

• To Transfer a Call to the Phone (SecretCall):

- Press and hold button on thesteering wheel until the audio systemtransfers a call to the phone.

1. Speaking at the same time, your voicemay not reach each otherparties. (Thisis not a malfunction.) Speak alternate-ly with the other party on the phone.

2. Keep the Bluetooth® volume to a lowlevel. High-level volume may result in

distortion and echo.3. When driving on a rough road.4. When driving at high speeds.5. When the window is open.6. When the air conditioning vents are

facing the microphone.7. When the sound of the air condition-

ing fan is loud.

the LCD.

The audio system head unit displays‘MP3 MODE’.


NOTE:

• In addition to streaming MP3 files,all music and sound files your cellu-lar phone supports can be playedby the audio system.

• Bluetooth ® compatible cellularphones must include A2DP andAVRCP capabilities.

• Some A2DP and AVRCP compatibleBluetooth ® cellular phones may notplay music through the audio sys-tem initially. These cellular phonesmay need to have the Bluetooth ®

streaming enabled, for example;

■ Phone SetupAll Bluetooth ® related operations can beperformed in PHONE menu.

1) Push the button to enterSETUP mode.

2) Select “PHONE” item by rotating theknob, then push the knob.

3) S l t d i d it b t ti th

• Pairing a phone

Before using Bluetooth ® features, thephone must be paired (registered) withthe audio system. Up to 5 phones can bepaired with the system.

NOTE:• The pairing procedure of the phone

varies according to each phonemodel. Before attempting to pairphone, please see your phone’sUser’s Guide for instructions.

• Once pairing with the phone is com-pleted, there is no need to pair withth t h i l th h

TUNE

SETUP



4 113

i.e : Menu➟Filemanager➟Music➟Option➟Play via Bluetooth

• Please refer to User’s Guide for yourcellular phone for more information.To cancel Bluetooth ® cellular phone

music streaming, stop music play-back on the cellular phone orchange the audio mode to AM/FM,XM, CD, iPod, ect.

3) Select desired item by rotating theknob, then push the knob.

that phone again unless the phoneis deleted manually from the audiosystem (refer “Deleting a Phone”section) or the vehicle’s informationis removed from the phone.

➀ Press button to enter SETUPmode.

➁ Select “PHONE”, then “PAIR PHONE”in PHONE menu.

➂ The audio displays “Device : [Name]passkey: 0000”

➃ Search and select the device name inyour mobile phone to starting the pair-ing process.

SETUP

TUNE


NOTE:

• If the phone is paired with two ormore vehicles of the same model,some phones may not handleBluetooth ® devices of that namecorrectly. In this case, you may needto change the name displayed onyour phone.

For example, if the vehicles' name isHMC CAR, you may need to changethe name displayed on you phonefrom HMC_CAR to JOHNS_CAR orHMC CAR_1 to avoid ambiguity.

Refer to your phone User’s Guide, orcontact your cellular carrier or phone

• Connecting a phone

When the Bluetooth ® system is enabled,the phone previously used is automati-cally selected and re-connected. If youwant to select different phone previouslypaired, the phone can be selectedthrough “Select Phone” menu.

Only a selected phone can be used with

the hands-free system at a time.


➁ Select “PAIR PHONE”, then “SELECT”in PHONE menu.

• Changing PriorityIf several phones are paired with theaudio system, the system attempts toconnect following order when theBluetooth ® system is enabled:

1) “Priority” checked phone.

2) Previously connected phone

3) Gives up auto connection.


➁ Select “PAIR PHONE”, then “PRIORITY”in PHONE menu.

➂ Select desired phone name from theli h

SETUP

SETUP



1144

contact your cellular carrier or phonemanufacturer for instructions.

➂ Select desired phone name from the listshown.

➃ The Bluetooth ® icon appears on theupper side of audio display when aphone is connected.

list shown.


• Deleting a Phone

The paired phone can be deleted.

- When the phone is deleted, all the infor-mation associated with that phone isalso deleted (including phonebook).

- If you want to use the deleted phone withthe audio system again, pairing proce-dure must be completed once more.


➁ Select “PAIR PHONE”, then “DELETE”in PHONE menu.

➂ Select desired phone name from the list

• ADVANCED Menu

After pressing the button, select“PHONE” menu. while in PHONE menu,select the “ADVANCED” menu to makeBluetooth ® Phone settings.

(The ADVANCED menu may differ accord-ing to audio specifications.)

Contacts Sync (Automatic Phonebook download setting)

While in ADVANCED menu, select“CONTACTS” To automatically save thecontacts and call history in your mobilephone each time you connect a mobiledevice, select ON. If you do not wish forautomatic download, select OFF.

It’s not available to make a phone call bybluetooth audio system while the phone-book is being downloaded.

Bluetooth ® system off

While in ADVANCED menu, select“BT OFF” to turn off the Bluetooth®

SETUP

SETUP



4 115

shown.Incoming Volume (Bluetooth ® call vol-ume adjustments)

While in ADVANCED menu, select“IN VOL.” Use the knob key to set the

desired volume and press thebutton.

BT OFF” to turn off the Bluetooth ®

System.

ENTER


■ Voice Recognition Activation• The voice recognition engine contained

in the Bluetooth ® System can be acti-vated in the following conditions:- Button Activation

The voice recognition system will beactive when the button is pressedand after the sound of a Beep.

- Active ListeningThe voice recognition system will beactive for a period of time when theVoice Recognition system has askedfor a customer response.

• The system can recognize single digits

■ Menu treeThe menu tree identifies available voicerecognition Bluetooth ® functions.

Call [Name] Ex) Call John(at Home)

Ex) Dial 911Dial [Number]

Redial

Call By name

By number

✽Tip■ Voice Operation

To get the best performance out of theVoice Recognition System, observe thefollowings:- Keep the interior of the vehicle as

quiet as possible. Close the windowto eliminate surrounding noise

(traffic noise, vibration sounds,etc), which may disturb recogniz-ing the voice command correctly.

- Speak a command after a beepsound within 5 seconds. Otherwisethe command will not be received

l



1164

• The system can recognize single digitsfrom zero to nine while number greaterthan ten will not be recognized.

• The system shall cancel voice recogni-

tion mode in following cases : Whenpressing the button and sayingcancel following the beep. When notmaking a call and pressing thebutton. When voice recognition hasfailed 3 consecutive times.

• At any time if you say “help”, the systemwill announce what commands areavailable.

Call Back

Add entryPhonebook

Change name

Delete name

By phone

By voice

properly.- Speak in a natural voice without

pausing between words.- While receiving voice commands,

press the button on the steer-

ing wheel remote controller to ter-minate guidance. Voice commandwill convert back to waiting modeto allow the user to say a new voicecommand.


■ Making a Phone Call• Direct Calling

➀ Press button.

➁ Say the following command.

- Call <John> :Connects the call to John.

- Call <John> on <Mobile> : Connectsthe call to John’s mobile phone number.

- Call <John> at <Home> : Connects

the call to john’s home number.- Call <John> in <Office> : Connects

the call to John’s office number.

Note:

Calls can be immediately connected

• Calling by Name

A phone call can be made by speakingnames registered in the audio system.

➀ Press button.

➁ Say “Call”.

➂ Say “By name” when prompted.

➃ Say desired name (in Phonebook or

voice tag).➄ Say desired location (phone number

type). Only stored locations can beselected.

➅ Say “Yes” to confirm and make a call.

• Dialing by Number

A phone call can be made by dialing thespoken numbers. The system can recog-nize single digits from zero to nine.

➀ Press button.

➁ Say “Call”.

➂ Say “By number” when prompted.

➃ Say desired phone numbers.➄ Say “Dial” to complete the number and

make a call.

✽Tip

A shortcut to each of the following func-



4 117

Calls can be immediately connectedto contacts who name or voice tag aresaved in the phonebook(or contacts).

✽Tip

A shortcut to each of the following func-tions is available:➀ Say “Call Name”

A shortcut to each of the following functions is available:➀ Say “Dial Number”

➁ Say “Dial <digit>”


■ Phone Book (In-Vehicle)• Adding entry by voice

Phone numbers and voice tags can beregistered. Entries registered in thephone can also be transferred.

➀ Press button.

➁ Say "Phonebook".

- The system replies with all availablecommands.

- To skip the information message,press again and then a beep isheard.

➂ Say “Add Entry”.

✽ NOTICE- The system can recognize single digits

from zero to nine. Numbers that areten or greater cannot be recognized.

- You can enter each digit individuallyor group digits together in preferredstring lengths.

- To speed up input, it is a good idea togroup all digits into a continuous string.

- Recommend to enter the numbersconstituted an grouping within alldigit numbers to dial 995 / 734 / 0000

- The display corresponding to eachoperation appears on the screen as fol-lows:

• Adding Entry by Phone

➀ Press button.

➁ Say "Phonebook".

➂ Say "Add Entry" after prompt.

➃ Say "By Phone" to proceed.

➄ Say “Yes” to confirm.

➅ Your phone will start to transferphone/contact list to the audio system.

This process may take over 10 min-utes depending on the phone modeland number of entries

➆ Wait till the audio displays “TransferComplete” message.



1184

➃ Say “By Voice” to proceed.

➄ Say the name of the entry whenprompted.

➅ Say “Yes” to confirm.

➆ Say the phone number of that entrywhen prompted.

➇ Say “Store” if phone number input isfinished.

➈ Say a phone number type. “Home”,“Work”, “Mobile”, “Other” or “Default” isavailable.

➉ Say “Yes” to complete adding entry.

Say “Yes” to store additional locationfor this contact, or say “Cancel” to fin-ish the process.

Input operation example:1. Say: “Nine, nine, five”➟ Display: “995”

2. And say: “Seven, three, four”➟ Display: “995734”

• Changing Name

The registered names can be modified.

➀ Press button.➁ Say “Phonebook”.

➂ Say “Change Name” after prompt.

➃ Say the name of the entry (voice tag).


➅ Say new desired name.

11


• Deleting Name

The registered names can be deleted.

➀ Press button.

➁ Say “Phonebook”.

➂ Say “Delete Name” after prompt.

➃ Say the name of the entry (voice tag).


■ Bluetooth ® Audio Speaker Adaptation

Speaker adaptation will improve perform-ance of voice recognition system to aparticular user voice.

This will degrade the performance forother users.

• Record

➀ Press button for 10sec.➁ Say “Record profile”.

➂ Say “Yes”.

➃ Say the word displayed on Radio.

• Delete



4 119

➀ Press button for 10sec.

➁ Say “Delete profile”.

➂ Say “Yes”.


■ Key matrix

No.

Class

Paired H/PEmpty

Disconnected

1

SHORT

LONG

Normal mode BT SETUP menuIncoming Call Outgoing Call Active Call 2nd Call

Not Paired Not Connecting - - Accept Call

Connected

-

2nd call

1st Call:waiting

2nd Call:active

2nd Call

2nd Call:waiting

1st Call:active

KEY

- - - - - - Transfer call:secret call



1204

SHORT

SHORT

LONG

[10sec]

LONG

[10sec]

End CallVR

MODE Cancel

VR

MODE Cancel

VR

MODE Cancel

VR

MODE CancelReject Call End Call End Call

-

Active

Change

language

-

Active

SpeakerAdaptation

(Only English)

Change

language

Active

Change

language

Active

-Speaker

Adaptation

(Only English)

Change

language

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

- -

2

3

5

Before driving / 5-3

Key positions / 5-5

Manual transaxle / 5-7

Automatic transaxle / 5-10

All wheel drive (AWD) / 5-17

Brake system / 5-24

Cruise control system / 5-36

Active ECO system / 5-40

Economical operation / 5-41Special driving conditions / 5-43

Winter driving / 5-47




Trailer towing / 5-55

Vehicle load limit / 5-58

Vehicle weight / 5-62


WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-dows immediately.

Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-tion.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you heara change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have theexhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage even with the garage door open is a hazardous practice Never run the engine in your



25

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in yourgarage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area

with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield arekept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.


Before entering vehicle

Be sure that all windows, outside mir-ror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tires.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign ofleaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behindyou if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid, and washer fluidshould be checked on a regular basis,with the exact interval depending on thefluid. Further details are provided in sec-tion 7, “Maintenance”.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNINGDriving while distracted can resultin a loss of vehicle control, thatmay lead to an accident, severepersonal injury, and death. The dri-ver’s primary responsibility is inthe safe and legal operation of a

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-TION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide varietyof automobile components andparts, including components foundin the interior furnishings in a vehi-cle, contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects andreproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of componentwear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or



5 3

g pvehicle, and use of any handhelddevices, other equipment, or vehi-cle systems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus away

from the safe operation of a vehicleor which are not permissible by lawshould never be used during oper-ation of the vehicle.

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm.


Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls areeasily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearviewmirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lightswhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position.

• Release the parking brake and makesure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.Drunk driving is the number onecontributor to the highway deathtoll each year. Even a small amountof alcohol will affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgment. Drivingwhile under the influence of drugsis as dangerous or more dangerousthan driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have aserious accident if you drink ortake drugs and drive

WARNING• When you intend to park or stop

the vehicle with the engine on, becareful not to depress the accel-erator pedal for a long period oftime. It may overheat the engineor exhaust system and cause fire.

• When you make a sudden stop orturn the steering wheel rapidly,loose objects may drop on thefloor and it could interfere withthe operation of the foot pedals,possibly causing an accident.Keep all things in the vehiclesafely stored.



45

y q p take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs,don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-er who has been drinking or takingdrugs. Choose a designated driveror call a cab.

safely stored.

• If you do not focus on driving, itmay cause an accident. Be care-ful when operating what may dis-turb driving such as audio orheater. It is the responsibility ofthe driver to always drive safely.

WARNINGAll passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is mov-ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section3 for more information on theirproper use.

WARNINGAlways check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for people,especially children, before putting avehicle into “Drive” or “Reverse”.


Ignition switch position

LOCK

Th t i h l l k t t t

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-trical accessories are operative.

✽ NOTICEIf difficulty is experienced turning theignition switch to the ACC position, turnthe key while turning the steering wheel

right and left to release the tension.

ON

The warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This is thenormal running position after the engineis started.

Do not lea e the ignition s itch ON if the

WARNING - Ignition key• Never turn the ignition key to

LOCK or ACC while the vehicle ismoving. This would result in lossof directional control and brakingfunction, which could cause anaccident.

• The anti-theft steering column lock is not a substitute for the parkingbrake. Before leaving the driver'sseat, always make sure the shiftlever is engaged in P (Park) for theautomatic transaxle, or reverse forthe manual transaxle, set the park-ing brake fully, and shut the engine

OUN036002

KEY POSITIONS



5 5

The steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, push the key inward atthe ACC position and turn the key towardthe LOCK position.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.

START Turn the ignition key to the START posi-tion to start the engine. The engine willcrank until you release the key; then itreturns to the ON position. The brakewarning lamp can be checked in thisposition.

g y, goff. Unexpected and sudden vehi-cle movement may occur if theseprecautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignition switch,or any other controls through thesteering wheel while the vehicle isin motion. The presence of yourhand or arm in this area couldcause a loss of vehicle control, anaccident and serious bodily injuryor death.

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver’s seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to an acci-

dent.




Manual transaxle operation

The manual transaxle has 5 (or 6*) for-ward gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shiftknob.The transaxle is fully synchronizedin all forward gears so shifting to either ahigher or a lower gear is easily accom-plished.

Press the clutch pedal down fully whileshifting, then release it slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-tion lock switch, the engine will not startwhen starting the engine withoutdepressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)

The gearshift lever must be returned tothe neutral position before shifting into R

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION• When downshifting from fifth

gear to fourth gear, caution should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift lever sideways in such a manner that second gear is engaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause the

engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red-zone. Such over- revving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage.

• Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when th i i i t hi h

■ 6 speed

■ 5 speed



5 7

the neutral position before shifting into R(Reverse).

The ring (1) located immediately belowthe shift knob must be pulled upward

while moving the shift lever to the R posi-tion. (if equipped)

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

OLM059009/OLM059009L

the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher).Such a downshifting may damage the engine.

The shift lever can be moved without pullingthe ring (1).The ring (1) must be pulled up while movingthe shift lever.


• During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricant haswarmed up. This is normal and notharmful to the transaxle.

• If you've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),put the shift lever in N (Neutral) posi-tion and release the clutch. Press theclutch pedal back down, and then shift

into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.

Using the clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the wayto the floor before shifting, then releasedslowly.The clutch pedal should always befully released while driving. Do not restyour foot on the clutch pedal while driv-ing. This can cause unnecessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to holdthe vehicle on an incline. This causes

unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake orparking brake to hold the vehicle on anincline. Do not operate the clutch pedalrapidly and repeatedly.

This vehicle is equipped with a Hill-startAssist Control(HAC) that will hold thevehicle in place for about 2 seconds

hen the brake is released on a sleep

CAUTION• To avoid premature clutch wear

and damage, do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal Also don’t use the clutch

WARNINGBefore leaving the driver’s seat,always set the parking brake fullyand shut the engine off.Then makesure the transaxle is shifted into 1stgear when the vehicle is parked ona level or uphill grade, and shiftedinto R (Reverse) on a downhill

grade. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifthese precautions are not followedin the order identified.



85

when the brake is released on a sleepenough uphill grade (about 8° incline).Practice releasing the brake and apply-ing the throttle with your right foot while

releasing the clutch with your left foot, soyou learn how the HAC works.

pedal. Also, don t use the clutch to hold the vehicle stopped on an uphill grade, while waiting for a traffic light, etc.

• Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

• When operating the clutch pedal,press the clutch pedal down fully.

If you don't press the clutch pedal fully, the clutch may be damaged or noise may occur.

WARNINGThe HAC is activated only for about2 seconds, so when the vehicle isstarting off always depress theaccelerator pedal.


Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traf-fic or while driving up steep hills, down-shift before the engine starts to labor.Downshifting reduces the chance ofstalling and gives better accelerationwhen you again need to increase yourspeed. When the vehicle is travelingdown steep hills, downshifting helps

maintain safe speed and prolongs brakelife.

This vehicle is geared for improved fueleconomy and may need to be driven in alower gear when driving up hills or intohigh winds.Using top gear is best for fueleconomy, but you should use the bestgear for the road conditions

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear andcoast down a hill. This is extremelyhazardous. Always leave the vehicle ingear.

• Don't "ride" the brakes.This can causethem to overheat and malfunction.Instead, when you are driving down along hill, slow down and shift to a lowergear. When you do this, engine brakingwill help slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. This will help avoid over-revvingthe engine, which can cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter crosswinds.This gives you much better con-

WARNING• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a properlybelted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steeringwheel movements, such as sharplane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if



5 9

gear for the road conditions.g y

trol of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completelystopped before you attempt to shift into

reverse. The transaxle can be dam-aged if you do not.To shift into reverse,depress the clutch, move the shift leverto neutral, then shift to the reverseposition.

• Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface,an abrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

two or more wheels drop off theroadway and the driver over-steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leavesthe roadway, do not steer sharply.Instead, slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-its.


Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forwardspeeds and one reverse speed. The indi-vidual speeds are selected automatically,depending on the position of the shiftlever.

✽ NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, maybe somewhat abrupt. This is a normalcondition, and the shifting sequence willadjust after shifts are cycled a few timesby the TCM (Transaxle ControlModule) or PCM (Powertrain ControlModule).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

+ (UP)+ (UP)



105

)

OLM059010

- (DO- (DOWN)WN)

Depress the brake pedal when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.




R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are notengaged. The vehicle will roll freely evenon the slightest incline unless the parkingbrake or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving posi-tion. The transaxle will automatically shiftthrough a 6-gear sequence, providing thebest fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing grades, depress theaccelerator fully, at which time the

transaxle will automatically downshift tothe next lower gear (or gears, as appro-priate).

✽ NOTICEAlways come to a complete stop beforeshifting into D (Drive).

CAUTIONThe transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTIONAlways come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transaxle if you shift into R while



125

the vehicle is in motion, except as explained in “Rocking the vehicle” in this section.


Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or inmotion, sports mode is selected by push-ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once toshift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards onceto shift down one gear.

✽ NOTICE• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with roadconditions, taking care to keep the

engine speed below the red zone.• In sports mode, only the 6 forward

gears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the shift leverto the R (Reverse) or P (Park) positionas required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are madeautomatically when the vehicle slows

(Continued)• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone the transaxlewill upshift automatically.

• If the driverpress the lever to +(up) or-(Down) position, the transaxle maynot make the requested gear change if the next gear is outside of the allow-able engine rpm range.

• When driving on a slippery road,push the shift lever forward into the+(up) position. This causes thetransaxle to shift into the 2nd gearwhich is better for smooth driving ona slippery road. Push the shift lever tothe -(down) side to shift back to the 1stgear.

OLM059012

SporSpor ts modets mode



5 13

ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-tion into the manual gate.To return to D(Drive) range operation, push the shiftlever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift leverbackwards and forwards will allow you tomake gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to amanual transaxle, the sports modeallows gearshifts with the acceleratorpedal depressed.

automatically when the vehicle slowsdown. When the vehicle stops, 1st gearis automatically selected.

(Continued)




Good driving practices

• Never move the gear shift lever from P(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-tion with the accelerator pedaldepressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever into P(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the vehicle is completelystopped before you attempt to shift intoR (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the vehicle out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may beextremely hazardous. Always leave thecar in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and malfunc-tion Instead when you are driving

• Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in P(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface,an abrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing the accelera-tor pedal.

WARNING• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a properlybelted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steeringwheel movements, such as sharplane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs iftwo or more wheels drop off the



5 15

tion. Instead, when you are drivingdown a long hill, slow down and shift toa lower gear. When you do this, enginebraking will help slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.

two or more wheels drop off theroadway and the driver over-steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leavesthe roadway, do not steer sharply.Instead, slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-its.


Moving up a steep grade from a stand- ing start

To move up a steep grade from a stand-ing start, depress the brake pedal, shiftthe shift lever to D (Drive). Release thebrake pedal and gradually press theaccelerator pedal.

The Hill-start Assist Control(HAC) willhold the vehicle brakes for up to 2 sec-

onds on grades steeper than 8° uphill.

WARNINGIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehicle freeby moving it forward and backward.Do not attempt this procedure ifpeople or objects are anywherenear the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenlymove forward or backward as itbecomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people orobjects.

WARNINGThe HAC is activated only for about2 seconds, so when the vehicle isstarting off always depress theaccelerator pedal.



165

p


Engine power can be delivered to all frontand rear wheels for maximum traction.AWD is useful when extra traction isrequired on road, such as, when drivingon slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-coveredroads. These vehicles are not designedfor challenging off-road use. Occasionaloff-road use such as establishedunpaved roads and trails are OK. It is

always important when traveling off-high-way that the driver carefully reduces thespeed to a level that does not exceed thesafe operating speed for those condi-tions. In general, off-road conditions pro-vide less traction and braking effective-ness than normal road conditions. Thedriver must be especially alert to avoiddriving on slopes which tilt the vehicle to

Tight corner brake effect

Tight corner brake effect is a uniquecharacteristic of all-wheel drive vehiclescaused by the difference in tire rotation atthe all wheels and the zero-degree align-ment of the front wheels and suspension.

Sharp turns at low speeds should be car-ried out with caution.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Off road driving

This vehicle is designed primarilyfor on road use although it can oper-ate effectively off road. However, itwas not designed to drive in chal-lenging off-road conditions. Drivingin conditions that exceed the vehi-cle's intended design or the driver's

experience level may result insevere injury or death.

CAUTION - AWDWhen turning sharply on a paved road at low speed while in four- wheel drive, steering control will be difficult.

WARNINGWhen AWD system warning lightilluminates, AWD system does not



5 17

driving on slopes which tilt the vehicle toeither side.

These factors must be carefully consid-

ered when driving off-road. Keeping thevehicle in contact with the driving surfaceand under control in these conditions isalways the driver's responsibility for thesafety of him/herself and his or her pas-sengers.

operate.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAIdealer as soon as possible.


• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., tomaximize traction.

• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds

AWD AUTO(AWD LOCK is

deactivated)

(Indicator light isnot illuminated)

ALL Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection

Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description

• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates sim-ilar to conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operatingconditions. However, if the system determines that there is aneed for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is dis-tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter-

vention.• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle

moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.

AWD LOCK



185

y g pabove 19 mph (30 km/h) and is shifted to AWD AUTO modeat speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). If the vehicle deceleratesto speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), however, the transfermode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.

✽ NOTICE• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indicator light goes

off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise or vibration.The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated. Some parts of the power train may be dam-aged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.

• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the front wheels.This shock is not a mechanical failure.

AWD LOCK

(Indicator light is

illuminated)




• You must consciously take the effort tolearn how to corner in a AWD vehicle.Do not rely on your experience in con-ventional 2WD vehicles in choosingsafe cornering speed in AWD mode.For starters, you must drive more slow-ly in AWD.

• Drive carefully off-road because yourvehicle may be damaged by rocks or

roots of trees.Become familiar with theoff-road conditions where you aregoing to drive before you begin driving.

• If you need to drive in the water, stopyour vehicle, set your transfer to theAWD LOCK mode and drive at lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

WARNING - Steeringwheel

Do not grab the inside of the steer-

WARNING - Wind danger

If you are driving in heavy wind, thevehicle's higher center of gravitydecreases your steering controlcapacity and requires you to drivemore slowly.

WARNING - Drivingthrough water

OLM059022L

WARNING - AWD

Reduce speed when you turn cor-ners. The center of gravity of AWDvehicles is higher than that of con



205

• Always hold the steering wheel firmlywhen you are driving off-road.

• Make sure all passengers are wearingseat belts.

Do not grab the inside of the steer-ing wheel when you are driving off-road. You may hurt your arm by a

sudden steering maneuver or fromsteering wheel rebound due toimpact with objects on the ground.You could lose control of the steer-ing wheel.

Drive slowly. If you are driving toofast in water, the water can get intothe engine compartment and wet

the ignition system, causing yourvehicle to suddenly stop. If thishappens and your vehicle is in atilted position, your vehicle may rollover.

Excessive water in the engine cancause irreversible engine damage,which is not covered under warran-ty.

vehicles is higher than that of con-ventional 2WD vehicles, makingthem more likely to roll over when

you turn corners too fast.




• Full-time AWD vehicles must be testedon a special four wheel chassisdynamometer.

✽ NOTICENever engage the parking brake whileperforming these tests.

• A full-time AWD vehicle should not be

tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a 2WDroll tester must be used, perform thefollowing: 1. Check the tire pressures recommend-

ed for your vehicle.

2. Place the front wheels on the rolltester for a speedometer test as shownin the illustration.

3. Release the parking brake.

WARNING - Dynamometertesting

Keep away from the front of thevehicle while the vehicle is in gearon the dynamometer. This is verydangerous as the vehicle can jumpforward and cause serious injury ordeath.

OCM051044LRoll tester (speedometer)Temporary free roller

CAUTION• When lifting up the vehicle,do not

operate front and rear wheel separately. All four wheels should be operated.

• If you need to operate the front



5 23

p g

4. Place the rear wheels on the tempo-rary free roller as shown in the illustra-

tion.

If you need to operate the front wheel and rear wheel when lifting up the vehicle, you should

release the parking brake.


Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically through normalusage.

In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of a stalledengine or some other reason, you canstill stop your vehicle by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal than you nor-

mally would.The stopping distance, how-ever, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partially depletedeach time the brake pedal is applied. Donot pump the brake pedal when thepower assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when neces-sary to maintain steering control on slip-

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot rest-ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormal high brake tem-peratures, excessive brake liningand pad wear, and increasedstopping distances.

• When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear andavoid continuous application ofthe brakes. Continuous brakeapplication will cause the brakesto overheat and could result in atemporary loss of braking per-formance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-cle’s ability to safely slow down;

(Continued)

• Always, confirm the position ofthe brake and accelerator pedalbefore driving. If you don't check the position of the acceleratorand brake pedal before driving,you may depress the acceleratorinstead of the brake pedal. It maycause a serious accident.



245

sary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

cle s ability to safely slow down;the vehicle may also pull to oneside when the brakes are applied.

Applying the brakes lightly willindicate whether they have beenaffected in this way. Always testyour brakes in this fashion afterdriving through deep water. Todry the brakes, apply them lightlywhile maintaining a safe forwardspeed until brake performancereturns to normal.

(Continued)




Check the brake warning light by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine).This light will be illuminated whenthe parking brake is applied with the igni-tion switch in the START or ON position.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

W-75

WARNING• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leavingthe vehicle, do not use the shiftlever in place of the parkingbrake. Set the parking brake ANDmake sure the shift lever issecurely positioned in P (Park).

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-miliar with the vehicle to touchthe parking brake. If the parkingbrake is released unintentionally,serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always havethe parking brake fully engagedwhen parking to avoid inadver-tent movement of the vehicle

hi h i j t

WARNINGABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-dents due to improper or danger-ous driving maneuvers. Eventhough vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, alwaysmaintain a safe distance between

you and objects ahead. Vehiclespeeds should always be reducedduring extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for vehiclesequipped with an anti-lock brakingsystem (or Electronic StabilityControl System) may be longerthan for those without it in the fol-lowing road conditions.



5 27

Before driving, be sure the parking brakeis fully released and the brake warning

light is off.If the brake warning light remains on afterthe parking brake is released while theengine is running, there may be a mal-function in the brake system. Immediateattention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-cle immediately. If that is not possible,use extreme caution while operating thevehicle and only continue to drive thevehicle until you can reach a safe loca-

tion or repair shop.

which can injure occupants orpedestrians.

lowing road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicleshould be driven at reducedspeeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-coveredroads.

• With tire chains installed.

(Continued)

CAUTION• Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

• Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the vehicle system and

make endanger driving safety.


The ABS continuously senses the speedof the wheels. If the wheels are going tolock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-lates the hydraulic brake pressure to thewheels.

When you apply your brakes under con-ditions which may lock the wheels, youmay hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensationin the brake pedal. This is normal and itmeans your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefitfrom your ABS in an emergency situa-tion, do not attempt to modulate yourbrake pressure and do not try to pumpyour brakes. Press your brake pedal ashard as possible or as hard as the situa-tion allows the ABS to control the forcebeing delivered to the brakes

✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehiclebegins to move after the engine is start-ed. These conditions are normal andindicate that the anti-lock brake systemis functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,

your vehicle still requires sufficientstopping distance. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from exces-sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti lock brake system

(Continued)

• On roads where the road surfaceis pitted or has different surfaceheight.

The safety features of an ABS (orESC) equipped vehicle should notbe tested by high speed driving orcornering.This could endanger thesafety of yourself or others.



285

being delivered to the brakes. operation of the anti-lock brake systemmay result in a longer stopping dis-

tance than for vehicles equipped with aconventional brake system.




Good braking practices To dry the brakes, apply the brakeslightly until the braking action returns tonormal, taking care to keep the vehicleunder control at all times. If the brakingaction does not return to normal, stopas soon as it is safe to do so and call anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer for assis-tance.

• Don't coast down hills with the vehicleout of gear. This is extremely haz-

ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at alltimes, use the brakes to slow down,then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safespeed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Restingyour foot on the brake pedal while driv-ing can be dangerous because thebrakes might overheat and lose theireffectiveness It also increases the wear

• Be cautious when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (automatictransaxle) or in first or reverse gear(manual transaxle). If your vehicle isfacing downhill, turn the front wheelsinto the curb to help keep the vehiclefrom rolling. If your vehicle is facinguphill, turn the front wheels away fromthe curb to help keep the vehicle from

rolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions to keep thevehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged posi-tion.This is most likely to happen whenthere is an accumulation of snow or icearound or near the rear brakes or if thebrakes are wet. If there is a risk that theparking brake may freeze apply it only

WARNING• Whenever you leave or park your

vehicle, always set the parkingbrake as far as possible and fullyengage the vehicle's transaxleinto the P (Park) position or infirst or reverse (manual

transaxle). If the parking brake isnot fully engaged, the vehiclemay move inadvertently andinjure yourself and others.

• All vehicles should always havethe parking brake fully engagedwhen parking to avoid inadver-tent movement of the vehiclewhich can injure occupants orpedestrians



5 35

• Check to be sure the parking brake isnot engaged and that the parking brakeindicator light is out before drivingaway.

• Driving through water may get thebrakes wet.They can also get wet whenthe vehicle is washed. Wet brakes canbe dangerous! Your vehicle will not stopas quickly if the brakes are wet. Wetbrakes may cause the vehicle to pull toone side.

effectiveness. It also increases the wearof the brake components.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,apply the brakes gently and keep thevehicle pointed straight ahead while youslow down.When you are moving slow-ly enough for it to be safe to do so, pulloff the road and stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic transaxle, don't let your vehiclecreep forward. To avoid creeping for-ward, keep your foot firmly on the brakepedal when the vehicle is stopped.

parking brake may freeze, apply it onlytemporarily while you put the shift lever

in P (automatic transaxle) or in first orreverse gear (manual transaxle) andblock the rear wheels so the vehiclecannot roll. Then release the parkingbrake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgradewith the accelerator pedal. This cancause the transaxle to overheat.Always use the brake pedal or parkingbrake.

pedestrians.




To set cruise control speed:

1. Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button onthe steering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which

3. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), andrelease it at the desired speed. TheSET indicator light in the instrumentcluster will illuminate. Release theaccelerator at the same time. Thedesired speed will automatically bemaintained

To increase cruise control setspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) andhold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.Release the lever at the speed you want.

OLM059031L OLM059033L OLM059032L



5 37

p ,must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going downhill.

p y

• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and

release it immediately. The cruisingspeed will increase by 1.0 mph (1.6km/h) each time you move the lever up(to RES+) in this manner.




Your vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, where youdrive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how manymiles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicleas economically as possible, use the fol-lowing driving suggestions to help savemoney in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" startsor full-throttle shifts and maintain asteady cruising speed. Don't racebetween stoplights. Try to adjust yourspeed to the traffic so you don't have tochange speeds unnecessarily. Avoidheavy traffic whenever possible.Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unnec-essary braking. This also reduces

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal or clutchpedal.This can increase fuel consump-tion and also increase wear on thesecomponents. In addition, driving withyour foot resting on the brake pedalmay cause the brakes to overheat,which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious conse-quences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep them

inflated to the recommended pressure.Incorrect inflation, either too much ortoo little, results in unnecessary tirewear. Check the tire pressures at leastonce a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are alignedcorrectly. Improper alignment canresult from hitting curbs or driving toofast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-ment causes faster tire wear and may

• Keep your vehicle in good condition.For better fuel economy and reducedmaintenance costs, maintain your vehi-cle in accordance with the mainte-nance schedule in section 7. If youdrive your vehicle in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required(see section 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximumservice, your vehicle should be kept

clean and free of corrosive materials. Itis especially important that mud, dirt,ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulateon the underside of the vehicle. Thisextra weight can result in increasedfuel consumption and also contributeto corrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your vehicle. Weight reducesfuel economy.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION



5 41

brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The fasteryou drive the more fuel your vehicleuses. Driving at a moderate speed, inthe highest gear appropriate for theconditions, especially on the highway,is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

also result in other problems as well as

greater fuel consumption.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than

necessary. If you are waiting (and notin traffic), turn off your engine andrestart only when you're ready to go.




Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions areencountered such as water, snow, ice,mud, sand, or similar hazards, followthese suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-tance for braking

• When braking with non-ABS brakespump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle isstopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, usesecond gear. Accelerate slowly toavoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, orother non-slip material under the drivewheels to provide traction when stalledin ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to freeit from snow, sand, or mud, first turn thesteering wheel right and left to clear thearea around your front wheels.Then, shiftback and forth between 1st (First) and R(Reverse) and any forward gear in vehi-cles equipped with an automatictransaxle. Do not race the engine, andspin the wheels as little as possible. If you

are still stuck after a few tries, have thevehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle toavoid engine overheating and possibledamage to the transaxle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

1VQA3002

WARNING - ABSDo not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatic

CAUTIONProlonged rocking may cause engine over-heating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.



5 43

tance for braking.

• Avoid sudden braking or steering.

Downshifting with an automatic

transaxle, while driving on slipperysurfaces can cause an accident.The sudden change in tire speedcould cause the tires to skid. Becareful when downshifting on slip-pery surfaces.


✽ NOTICEThe ESC system should be turned OFFprior to rocking the vehicle. Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-ners, especially when roads are wet.Ideally, corners should always be takenunder gentle acceleration. If you followthese suggestions, tire wear will be heldto a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight, hereare some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distancebetween you and other vehicles, as itmay be more difficult to see at night,

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, especiallyat speeds more than 35 mph (56km/h). Spinning the wheels at highspeeds when the vehicle is station-ary could cause a tire to overheatwhich could result in tire damagethat may injure bystanders.

ORV047004 OCM053010

WARNINGIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehicle freeby moving it forward and backward



445

may be more difficult to see at night,

especially in areas where there maynot be any street lights.

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure ifpeople or objects are anywherenear the vehicle. During the rockingoperation the vehicle may suddenlymove forward or backward as itbecomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people orobjects.




Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures tospecification. Low tire inflation pressureswill result in overheating and possiblefailure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget tocheck both engine coolant and engineoil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may resultin overheating of the engine.

WARNING• Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling,loss of vehicle control, and sud-den tire failure leading to acci-dents, injuries, and even death.Always check tires for properinflation before driving. For prop-er tire pressures, refer to “Tires

and wheels” in section 8.• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-

cient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can result in loss ofvehicle control, collisions, injury,and even death. Worn-out tiresshould be replaced as soon aspossible and should never beused for driving. Always check the tire tread before driving yourcar For further information and

1VQA1004



465

o d us g o o da aged es c

may result in reduced traction or tire fail-ure.

✽ NOTICENever exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

car. For further information and

tread limits, refer to “Tires andwheels” in section 7.


The more severe weather conditions ofwinter result in greater wear and otherproblems. To minimize the problems ofwinter driving, you should follow thesesuggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it maybe necessary to use snow tires or toinstall tire chains on your tires. If snowtires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and type of theoriginal equipment tires. Failure to do somay adversely affect the safety and han-dling of your vehicle. Furthermore,speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden

brake applications, and sharp turns arepotentially very hazardous practices.During deceleration, use engine brakingto the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-cations on snowy or icy roads may causeskids to occur. You need to keep suffi-cient distance between the vehicle inoperation in front and your vehicle. Also,apply the brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tire willprovide a greater driving force, but will

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,make sure they are radial tires of thesame size and load range as the originaltires. Mount snow tires on all four wheelsto balance your vehicle’s handling in allweather conditions. Keep in mind that thetraction provided by snow tires on dryroads may not be as high as your vehi-cle's original equipment tires. You should

drive cautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer for max-imum speed recommendations.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalent insize and type to the vehicle's stan-dard tires. Otherwise, the safetyand handling of your vehicle maybe adversely affected.

1VQA3005



5 47

not prevent side skids.

✽ NOTICETire chains are not legal in all states.Check state laws before fitting tirechains.

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.


Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires arethinner, they can be damaged by mount-ing some types of snow chains on them.Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-ommended instead of snow chains. Donot mount tire chains on vehiclesequipped with aluminum wheels; snow

When using tire chains, attach them tothe drive wheels as follows.

2WD : Front wheels

AWD : All four wheels

If a full set of chains is not avail-able for an AWD vehicle, chainsmay be installed on the frontwheels only.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manu-facturer's instructions and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withchains installed. If you hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stop andtighten them. If they still make contact,slow down until it stops. Remove thechains as soon as you begin driving oncleared roads.

CAUTION• Make sure the snow chains are the correct size and type for your tires. Incorrect snow chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspension and may not be covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty. Also, the snow chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the snow

WARNING- Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground awayfrom traffic. Turn on the vehicleHazard Warning flashers and placea triangular emergency warningdevice behind the vehicle if avail-able. Always place the vehicle in P

1VQA3007



485

equipped with aluminum wheels; snow

chains may cause damage to the wheels.If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehiclecaused by improper snow chain use isnot covered by your vehicle manufactur-ers warranty.

chains to come loose from the tire. Make sure the snow chains are SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose.

y p

(Park), apply the parking brake andturn off the engine before installingsnow chains.




To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine intothe key opening. If a lock is covered withice, squirt it with an approved de-icingfluid to remove the ice. If the lock isfrozen internally, you may be able to thawit out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washeranti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedwindow washer anti-freeze solution inaccordance with instructions on the con-tainer. Window washer anti-freeze isavailable from an authorized HYUNDAIdealer and most auto parts outlets. Donot use engine coolant or other types of

Don't let your parking brakefreeze

Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged position.This is most likely to happen when thereis an accumulation of snow or ice aroundor near the rear brakes or if the brakesare wet. If there is a risk the parkingbrake may freeze, apply it only temporar-ily while you put the shift lever in P (auto-

matic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear(manual transaxle) and block the rearwheels so the car cannot roll. Thenrelease the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accumu-late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and icecan build up under the fenders and inter-fere with the steering. When driving in

Carry emergency equipmentDepending on the severity of the weath-er, you should carry appropriate emer-gency equipment. Some of the items youmay want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergencyflares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, awindow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,coveralls, a blanket, etc.



505

anti-freeze as these may damage thepaint finish. severe winter conditions where this mayhappen, you should periodically checkunderneath the vehicle to be sure themovement of the front wheels and thesteering components is not obstructed.




If you do decide to pull a trailer

Here are some important points if youdecide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control.You canask a hitch dealer about sway control.

• Do not do any towing with your car dur-ing its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) inorder to allow the engine to properlybreak in. Failure to heed this cautionmay result in serious engine or

transaxle damage.• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-

sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer forfurther information on additionalrequirements such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-ate speed (less than 60 mph / 100km/h).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towingspeed limit, whichever is lower.

Item Ibs. (kg)

Maximum trailer weight

Without brake System 1000 (454)

With brake System 2000 (907)

Maximum permissible static

vertical load on the coupling device200 (91)



565

• The chart contains important consider-ations that have to do with weight:


Weight of the trailer

What is the maximum safe weight of atrailer? It should never weigh more thanthe maximum trailer weight with trailerbrakes. But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use yourtrailer. For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature and how

f hi l i d ll il

Weight of the trailer tongue

The tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measure because itaffects the total gross vehicle weight(GVW) of your vehicle. This weightincludes the curb weight of the vehicle,any cargo you may carry in it, and thepeople who will be riding in the vehicle.

A d if ill il dd

The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-mum of 10% of the total loaded trailerweight, within the limits of the maximumtrailer tongue load permissible. Afteryou've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-er and then the tongue, separately, tosee if the weights are proper. If theyaren’t, you may be able to correct themsimply by moving some items around inthe trailer.

C190E01JM

Tongue Load Total Trailer WeightWARNING - Trailer

• Never load a trailer with moreweight in the rear than in thefront. The front should be loadedwith approximately 60% of thetotal trailer load; the rear shouldbe loaded with approximately 40%of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximumweight limits of the trailer or trail-

i i I

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight



5 57

often your vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. The ideal trailer weightcan also depend on any special equip-ment that you have on your vehicle.

And if you will tow a trailer, you must addthe tongue load to the GVW becauseyour vehicle will also be carrying thatweight.

er towing equipment. Improperloading can result in damage toyour vehicle and/or personalinjury. Check weights and loadingat a commercial scale or highwaypatrol office equipped with scales.

• An improperly loaded trailer cancause loss of vehicle control.


Vehicle capacity weight:

926 lbs. (420 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:

Total : 5 persons(Front seat : 2 persons,Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.However, the seating capacity maybe reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.

D t l d th hi l th

Towing capacity:

Without trailer brakes:1000 lbs (454 kg)

With trailer brakes:2000 lbs (907 kg)

Towing capacity is the maximumtrailer weight including its cargoweight, your vehicle can tow.

Cargo capacity: The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trail-er.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1 L t th t t t "Th

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

OLM059100N



585

Tire and loading information label

The label located on the driver's doorsill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for yourvehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

1. Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle'splacard.

OLM059101N


2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, if

the "XXX" amount equals 1400lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lb(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacityl l t d i St 4

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 1400 lbs

Weight (635 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2(136 kg)

A il bl C d 1100 lb

Example 1

A B CC190F02JM



Weight (635 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight750 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 5(340 kg)

A il bl C d 650 lb

A B C

Example 2



5 59

cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The com-bined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.

CAvailable Cargo and 1100 lbs

Luggage weight (499 kg)C

Available Cargo and 650 lbs

Luggage weight (295 kg)


Certification label

The certification label is located onthe driver's door sill at the center pil-lar.

This label shows the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle. This is called the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The

To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to goto a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the center-line.

C190F03JM



Weight (635 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight860 lbs

172 lbs (78 kg) × 5(390 kg)

Available Cargo and 540 lbs

A B C

Example 3

OEN056020

WARNING - Over loading

• Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axleand vehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings cancause an accident or vehicledamage.You can calculate theweight of your load by weigh-ing the items (or people)before putting them in thevehicle.Be careful not to over-

load your vehicle



605

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

CAvailable Cargo and 540 lbs

Luggage weight (245 kg)

load your vehicle.(Continued)


The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

(Continued)

• Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR, eitherthe maximum front or rearGAWR and vehicle capacityweight. If you do, parts,including tires on your vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles

and braking ability. This couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehi-cle.

WARNING• Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possibletire failure that could lead to acrash.

• Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-

tances that could lead to acrash.

• A crash resulting from poorhandling vehicle damage, tirefailure, or increased stoppingdistances could result in seri-ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargoItems you carry inside yourvehicle can strike and injureoccupants in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

• Put items in the cargo area ofyour vehicle.Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-cases, inside the vehicleabove the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.CAUTION

• Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would



5 61

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

• Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

This section will guide you in the properloading of your vehicle and/or trailer, tokeep your loaded vehicle weight within itsdesign rating capability, with or without atrailer. Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehicledesign performance. Before loading yourvehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-lowing terms for determining your vehi-cle's weight ratings, with or without atrailer, from the vehicle's specifications

and the certification label:

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle includinga full tank of fuel and all standard equip-ment. It does not include passengers,cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your dealerplus any aftermarket equipment

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added tothe Base Curb Weight, including cargoand optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on eachaxle (front and rear) - including vehiclecurb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowable weightthat can be carried by a single axle (frontor rear). These numbers are shown onthe certification label.The total load on each axle must neverexceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual

Cargo Weight plus passengers

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle (including alloptions, equipment, passengers andcargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-tification label located on the driver’sdoor sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT




when you picked it up from your dealerplus any aftermarket equipment. Cargo Weight plus passengers.

5 62

6

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2

If the engine will not start / 6-3

Emergency starting / 6-4

If the engine overheats / 6-6

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-7

If you have a flat tire / 6-12

Towing / 6-20





ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as awarning to other drivers to exerciseextreme caution when approaching,overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergencyrepairs are being made or when the vehi-cle is stopped near the edge of a road-way.

Depress the flasher switch with the igni-tion switch in any position. The flasherswitch is located in the center consoleswitch panel. All turn signal lights willflash simultaneously.

The hazard warning flasher operateswhether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when thehazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using thehazard warning flasher while the vehi-cle is being towed.

If the engine stalls at a crossroador crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing, set the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-cle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedaland let the vehicle slow down whiledriving straight ahead.Do not apply thebrakes immediately or attempt to pulloff the road as this may cause a loss ofcontrol. When the vehicle has slowedto such a speed that it is safe to do so,brake carefully and pull off the road.Drive off the road as far as possibleand park on firm, level ground. If youare on a divided highway, do not parkin the median area between the two

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

WHILE DRIVING

OLM049084



26

in the median area between the twotraffic lanes.


2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn onyour emergency hazard flashers, setthe parking brake and put the transaxlein P (automatic transaxle) or reverse(manual transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of thevehicle. Be sure they all get out on theside of the vehicle that is away fromtraffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, follow the

instruction provided later in this sec-tion.

If engine stalls while driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If yourvehicle will not start, contact anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer or seekother qualified assistance.

If engine doesn't turn over orturns over slowly

1. If your vehicle has an automatictransaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-gency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you operate the

starter, the battery is discharged.4. Check the starter connections to be

sure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to startit. See instructions for "Jump starting".

If engine turns over normally butdoes not start

1. Check fuel level.

2. With the ignition switch in the LOCKposition, check all connectors at igni-tion coils and spark plugs. Reconnectany that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer or seekother qualified assistance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

WARNINGIf the engine will not start, do notpush or pull the vehicle to start it.This could result in a collision or

cause other damage. In addition,



6 3

q g ,push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be over-loaded and create a fire hazard.


EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order anddisconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if doneincorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm toyourself or damage to your vehicle orbattery, follow the jump starting proce-dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-mend that you have a competent techni-cian or towing service jump start yourvehicle.

CAUTIONUse only a 12-volt jumper system.You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-duces hydrogen gas which mayexplode if exposed to flame orsparks.

If these instructions are not fol-lowed exactly, serious personalinjury and damage to the vehicle

may occur! If you are not surehow to follow this procedure,seek qualified assistance.Automobile batteries contain sul-furic acid. This is poisonous andhighly corrosive. When jumpstarting, wear protective glassesand be careful not to get acid onyourself, your clothing or on thevehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolyte levelWARNING - Battery

1VQA4001

Dischargedbattery

Jumper Cables

Booster

battery

(-)

(+)

(+)(-)



46

g yis frozen or if the electrolyte levelis low; the battery may rupture orexplode.

WARNING BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery as thismay cause the battery to rupture orexplode causing serious injury.


Jump starting procedure

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-volt and that its negative terminal isgrounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles totouch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact

sequence shown in the illustration.First connect one end of a jumpercable to the positive terminal of thedischarged battery (1), then connectthe other end to the positive terminalon the booster battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of theother jumper cable to the negative ter-minal of the booster battery (3), thenthe other end to a solid, stationary,metallic point (for example, the enginelifting bracket) away from the battery

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-tact anything except the correct batteryterminals or the correct ground. Do notlean over the battery when makingconnections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and let it run at 2,000rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have your vehi-

Push-starting

Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicleshould not be push-started because itmight damage the emission control sys-tem.

Vehicles equipped with automatictransaxle cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative ter-

minal of the discharged battery.This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.

WARNINGNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge forwardwhen the engine starts could causea collision with the tow vehicle.



6 5

(4). Do not connect it to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked.

pp y ycle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, you experience a loss of power,or hear loud pinging or knocking, theengine is probably too hot. If this hap-pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as itis safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (automatictransaxle) or neutral (manual transaxle)and set the parking brake. If the air con-ditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out underthe vehicle or steam is coming outfrom the hood, stop the engine.Do notopen the hood until the coolant hasstopped running or the steaming hasstopped. If there is no visible loss ofengine coolant and no steam, leavethe engine running and check to besure the engine cooling fan is operat-ing. If the fan is not running, turn the

engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drivebelt is missing. If it is not missing,check to see that it is tight. If the drivebelt seems to be satisfactory, check forcoolant leaking from the radiator,hoses or under the vehicle. (If the airconditioning had been in use, it is nor-mal for cold water to be draining fromit when you stop).

5. If the water pump drive belt is brokenor engine coolant is leaking out, stopthe engine immediately and call thenearest authorized HYUNDAI dealerfor assistance.

6. If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the engine tem-perature has returned to normal. Then,if coolant has been lost, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir to bring thefluid level in the reservoir up to thehalfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. If over-heating happens again, call an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

WARNINGWhile the engine is running, keephair, hands and clothing away frommoving parts such as the fan anddrive belts to prevent injury.

CAUTIONSerious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING



66

WARNINGDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. This canallow coolant to be blown out of theopening and cause serious burns.


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

(1) Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pres-

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. Whenthe system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximate-ly one minute and then remain con-tinuously illuminated. This sequence

will continue upon subsequent vehi-cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-tion exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunction

OLM069012



6 7

p (your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

bility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-nate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function proper-ly.


✽ NOTICEIf the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure indi-cator does not illuminate for 3 sec-onds when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position or theengine is running, or if it remainsilluminated after coming on forapproximately 3 seconds, take yourvehicle to your nearest authorizedHYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked.

Low tire pressure tell-tale

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning indicator is illuminat-ed, one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated.

Immediately reduce your speed,avoid hard cornering and anticipate

increased stopping distances. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible. Inflate the tires tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s placard or tire inflationpressure label located on the driver’sside center pillar outer panel. If youcannot reach a service station or ifthe tire cannot hold the newly addedair, replace the low pressure tire withthe compact spare tire.

Then the TPMS malfunction indicator

✽ NOTICEThe compact spare tire is notequipped with a tire pressure sensor.



86

may turn on and the Low TirePressure telltale will remain on untilyou have the low-pressure tirerepaired and replaced on the vehicle.


TPMS (Tire PressureMonitoring System)malfunction indicator

The low tire pressure telltale will illu-minate after it blinks for approximate-ly one minute when there is a prob-lem with the Tire PressureMonitoring system.

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soonas possible to determine the causeof the problem.

WARNING - Low pressuredamage

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.

Continued driving on low pres-sure tires can cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

CAUTIONIn winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunction- ing because the decreased tem-

perature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation

pressure.



6 9


Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure warning indicator will turnon. Have the flat tire repaired by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer as soonas possible or replace the flat tirewith the compact spare tire.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You must

use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always have

After you replace the low pressuretire with the compact spare tire, theTPMS malfunction indicator may beilluminated after a few minutesbecause the compact spare tire doesnot have a sensor.

Once the low pressure tire is re-inflated to the recommended pres-sure and installed on the vehicle, theTPMS malfunction indicator and the

low tire pressure telltale will extin-guish within a few minutes.

If the indicators do not extinguishafter a few minutes, please visit anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

You may not be able identify a lowtire by simply looking at it. Alwaysuse a good quality tire pressuregauge to measure the tire's inflationpressure. Please note that a tire that

is hot (from being driven) will have ahigher pressure measurement than a

CAUTION• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may be illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables or radios transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcast- ing stations, military installa-

tions, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if snow chains are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile

charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the hi l Thi i t f ith

CAUTIONNEVER use a puncture-repairing agent to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. The tire sealant can damage the tire pressure sensor. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor.



106

your tires serviced by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressuretire with the compact spare tire, theLow Tire Pressure warning indicatorwill remain on until the low pressuretire is repaired and placed on thevehicle.

higher pressure measurement than atire that is cold (from sitting station-ary for at least 3 hours and drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that3 hour period).

vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).


Allow the tire to cool before measur-ing the inflation pressure. Always besure the tire is cold before inflating tothe recommended pressure.

A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3hour period.

This device complies with Part 15of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-ference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired

operation.CAUTION

Do not use any tire sealant if your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System. The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure sensors. WARNING - Protecting

TPMSTampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)

components may interfere withthe system's ability to warn the

WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external fac-tors such as nails or roaddebris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator, apply the

brakes gradually and withlight force,and slowly move toa safe position off the road. WARNING

Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user's authorityto operate the equipment.



6 11

y b ydriver of low tire pressure con-ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modify-ing, or disabling the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS) components may voidthe warranty for that portion ofthe vehicle.


IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Jack and tools

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nutwrench are stored in the luggagecompartment. Pull up the luggagebox cover to reach this equipment.

(1) Jack handle(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”while the vehicle is in motion, store itproperly.

Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing tires• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire.The jack shouldbe used on level firm levelground. If you cannot find a

firm, level place off the road,call a towing service company

OLM069001



126

call a towing service companyfor assistance.

(Continued)


Removing and storing the sparetire

Remove the luggage floor support(1).

Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt (2)counterclockwise.

Store the tire in the reverse order of

removal.Replace the luggage floor support

Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and applythe parking brake firmly.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in R(Reverse) with manual transaxle orP (Park) with automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

(Continued)

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; neveruse the bumpers or any otherpart of the vehicle for jack support.

• The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack causing serious

injury or death. No personshould place any portion oftheir body under a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack;use vehicle support stands.

• Do not start or run the enginewhile the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on the

jack.• Make sure any children pres-

OLM069002 1VQA4022



6 13

gg g(1) after tightening the wing bolt.

To prevent the spare tire and toolsfrom “rattling” while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

y pent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.


4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

1VQA4023 OLM069006

WARNING - Changing a tire

• To prevent vehicle movementwhile changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully,and always block the wheeldiagonally opposite the wheelbeing changed.

• We recommend that thewheels of the vehicle be

blocked, and that no personremain in a vehicle that isbeing jacked.



146


7. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 1.2 in (30 mm).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance for

movement or slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts andremove them with your fingers.Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. Toput the wheel on the hub, pick upthe spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheelonto them. If this is difficult, tip thewheel slightly and get the top holein the wheel lined up with the top

stud. Then jiggle the wheel backand forth until the wheel can beslid over the other studs.

WARNING - Jack location

To reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicle

OCM049013N OCM054012



6 15

jack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.


10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it onthe studs, put the wheel nuts onthe studs and tighten them fingertight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it iscompletely seated, then tightenthe nuts as much as possiblewith your fingers again.

11. Lower the vehicle to the groundby turning the wheel nut wrenchcounterclockwise.

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use an exten-sion pipe over the wrench handle. Goaround the wheel tightening every nutfollowing the numerical sequence

shown in the image until they are alltight. Then double-check each nut fortightness After changing wheels have

WARNINGWheels may have sharp edges.Handle them carefully to avoidpossible severe injury. Beforeputting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on thehub or wheel (such as mud, tar,gravel, etc.) that prevents withthe wheel from fitting solidly

against the hub.If there is, remove it. If contact ofthe mounting surface betweenthe wheel and hub is not good,the wheel nuts could comeloose and cause the loss of awheel. Loss of a wheel mayresult in loss of control of thevehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

OLM069007



166

tightness. After changing wheels, havean authorized HYUNDAI dealer tight-en the wheel nuts to their propertorque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:

65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)


If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure.If the pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the cor-rect pressure. If it is too high, adjustit until it is correct. Always reinstallthe valve cap after checking oradjusting tire pressure. If the cap isnot replaced, dust and dirt may getinto the tire valve and air may leakfrom the tire. If you lose a valve cap,buy another and install it as soon aspossible.

After you have changed wheels,always secure the flat tire in its placeand return the jack and tools to theirproper storage locations.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice-versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collisionresulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequatespare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tire. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.

Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-tion 8.



6 17


Important - use of compact spare tire Your vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽ NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it to

the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances shouldyou exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, could

seriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter is

CAUTION

• You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tire in use at the same time.

WARNINGThe compact spare tire is foremergency use only. Do notoperate your vehicle on thiscompact spare at speeds over50 mph (80 km/h). The originaltire should be repaired orreplaced as soon as is possibleto avoid failure of the spare

possibly leading to personalinjury or death.



186

p psmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately 1inch (25 mm), which could result indamage to the vehicle.


• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the com-pact spare tire. Because of thesmaller size, a tire chain will not fitproperly. This could damage thevehicle and result in loss of thechain.

• The compact spare tire should not

be installed on the front axle if thevehicle must be driven in snow oron ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tire

regularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same size

d d i t d th

• The compact spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the compact spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car compo-nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compactspare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

CAUTIONWhen the original tire and wheel are repaired and reinstalled on the vehicle, the wheel nut torque must be set correctly to prevent wheel vibration. The correct wheel nut tightening torque is 65~79lb-ft (9~11kg.m).



6 19

and design, mounted on the samewheel.


TOWING

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, werecommend having it done by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial

On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must betowed with a wheel lift and dollies orflatbed equipment with all the wheels offthe ground.

On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to towthe vehicle with the rear wheels on theground (without dollies) and the frontwheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-sion components are damaged or thevehicle is being towed with the frontwheels on the ground, use a towing dollyunder the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial towtruck and wheel dollies are not used, thefront of the vehicle should always be lift-

CAUTIONThe AWD vehicle should never be towed with the wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle or the AWD system.

OUN046030

OUN046029

CAUTION• Do not tow the vehicle backwards

with the front wheels on the

OXM069028

dolly

dolly



206

tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-ing procedures are necessary to preventdamage to the vehicle.The use of wheeldollies or flatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines information,refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.

front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.


When towing your vehicle in an emer-gency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-tion.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (rear)

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tow-ing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing thelower part of the cover on the rearbumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning itclockwise into the hole until it is fully

secured.4. Remove the towing hook and install

the cover after use.

Emergency towingIf towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by an authorized

CAUTIONFailure to place the transaxle shift

lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle. OLM069016L

OLM069014

OLM069015

■ Front

■ Rear



6 21

you to have it done by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer or a commercial towtruck service.


WARNINGUse extreme caution when towingthe vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which wouldplace excessive stress on theemergency towing hook and tow-ing cable or chain. The hook andtowing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or dam-

age.• If the disabled vehicle is cannot

be moved, do not forcibly contin-ue the towing. Contact an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer or a com-mercial tow truck service forassistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-ing towing.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed using a cable or chainsecured to the emergency towing hookunder the front (or rear) of the vehicle.Use extreme caution when towing thevehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle tosteer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, power train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-cle out of mud, sand or other condi-tions from which the vehicle cannot bedriven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than thevehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other frequent-ly.

• Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook.Apply steady andeven force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a vertical angle.Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi- cally intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the

cable or chain to the towing hook provided.



226


• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5m) long. Attach a white or red cloth(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in themiddle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strapis not loosened during towing.

Emergency towing precautions • Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transaxle shift lever in N(Neutral).

• Release the parking bake.

• Press the brake pedal with more forcethan normal since you will havereduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be requiredbecause the power steering systemwill be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, thebrakes may overheat and brake per-formance will be reduced. Stop oftenand let the brakes cool off.

OEN066014

CAUTION - Automatictransaxle

• If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. Adriver must be in the towed vehi-

cle to operate the steering and brakes.

• To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle, limit the vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph) and drive less than 1.5 km (1mile) when towing.

• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking,

flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used.



6 23


Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing) (if equipped)

WARNING• Do not use the hooks under the

front (or rear) of the vehicle fortowing purposes. These hooksare designed ONLY for transporttie-down. If the tie-down hooksare used for towing, the tie-downhooks or front (or rear) bumperwill be damaged and this couldlead to serious injury.

• The hooks should be placedtoward the front of the vehiclewhen using the front holes andshould be placed toward the rearof the vehicle when using the rearholes for tie down purpose.

If not, the front or rear undercover will be damaged.

OLM069017N



246

7

Engine compartment / 7-2Maintenance services / 7-3

Owner maintenance / 7-4

Scheduled maintenance service / 7-6

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-18

Engine oil / 7-21

Engine coolant / 7-22

Brake/clutch fluid / 7-25

Washer fluid / 7-26

Parking brake / 7-27

Air cleaner / 7-28

Climate control air filter / 7-29

Wiper blades / 7-31

Battery / 7-34

Tires and wheels / 7-37

Fuses / 7-50

Light bulbs / 7-59

Appearance care / 7-66Emission control system / 7-72

California perchlorate notice / 7-75

Maintenance



Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake/Clutch* fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

* : if equipped



27

OLM079001

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care toprevent damage to your vehicle andinjury to yourself whenever performingany maintenance or inspection proce-dures.

Should you have any doubts concerningthe inspection or servicing of your vehi-cle, we strongly recommend that youhave an authorized HYUNDAI dealerperform this work.

An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac-

tory-trained technicians and genuineHYUNDAI parts to service your vehicleproperly. For expert advice and qualityservice, see an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficientservicing may result in operational prob-lems with your vehicle that could lead tovehicle damage, an accident, or person-al injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽ NOTICEMaintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that showproper maintenance has been performedon your vehicle in accordance with thescheduled maintenance service chartsshown on the following pages. You needthis information to establish your compli-ance with the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is providedin your Owner’s Handbook & WarrantyInformation booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as aresult of improper maintenance or a lackof required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehicle

maintained and repaired by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorizedHYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s highservice quality standards and receives

Owner maintenance precautionsImproper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, sev-eral procedures can be done only by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer with specialtools.

✽ NOTICEImproper owner maintenance during thewarranty period may affect warrantycoverage. For details, read the separateOwner’s Handbook & WarrantyInformation booklet provided with thevehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-icing or maintenance procedure, have itdone by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.



7 3

service quality standards and receivestechnical support from HYUNDAI inorder to provide you with a high level ofservice satisfaction.

Maintenance

The following lists are vehicle checks andinspections that should be performed bythe owner or an authorized HYUNDAIdealer at the frequencies indicated tohelp ensure safe, dependable operationof your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your dealer assoon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks aregenerally not covered by warranties and

you may be charged for labor, parts andlubricants used.

Owner maintenance scheduleWhen you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in coolantreservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluidlevel.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Youcan be seriously injured whileperforming some maintenanceprocedures. If you lack sufficientknowledge and experience or theproper tools and equipment to dothe work, have it done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.• Working under the hood with the

engine running is dangerous. Itbecomes even more dangerouswhen you wear jewelry or looseclothing. These can becomeentangled in moving parts andresult in injury. Therefore, if youmust run the engine while work-ing under the hood, make certainthat you remove all jewelry (espe-

cially rings, bracelets, watches,and necklaces) and all neckties,scarves, and similar loose cloth-ing before getting near the

OWNER MAINTENANCE

WARNINGBe careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure. This could cause burnsor other serious injury.



47

ing before getting near theengine or cooling fans.

Maintenance

While operating your vehicle: • Note any changes in the sound of theexhaust or any smell of exhaust fumesin the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steeringeffort or looseness in the steeringwheel, or change in its straight-aheadposition.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turnsslightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-

eling on smooth, level road.• When stopping, listen and check for

unusual sounds, pulling to one side,increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-ation of your transaxle occurs, checkthe transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle P(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle(water dripping from the air condition-ing system during or after use is nor-

At least monthly: • Check the coolant level in the enginecoolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exteriorlights, including the stoplights, turn sig-nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air con-ditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check the windshield washer sprayand wiper operation. Clean the wiperblades with clean cloth dampened withwasher fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.

• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,shields and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

At least once a year: • Clean the body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate the door hinges and checks,and hood hinges.

• Lubricate the door and hood locks andlatches.

• Lubricate the door rubber weather-strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate the automatictransaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake/clutch* fluid level.

* : if equipped



7 5

mal).

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule ifthe vehicle is usually operated wherenone of the following conditions apply. Ifany of the following conditions apply, fol-low Maintenance Under Severe UsageConditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandyareas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or lowspeed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in coldtemperatures and/or extremely humidclimates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy citytraffic during hot weather above 90°F

(32°C).

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect,replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule.After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) continue to follow the pre- scribed maintenance intervals.



67

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEThe following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for allvehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-mined by whichever occurs first.

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect electronic throttle control

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads




❑ Replace engine oil and filter(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)







7 7

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)


Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months



❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *2

❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *2

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends onfuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filterimmediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer for details.

*2 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have beensubmerged in water.








❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,upper arm ball joint


❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑ Inspect fuel filter *1

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter



87



Maintenance









❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)













7 9

Maintenance









❑Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)









❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect valve clearance *3

❑ Inspect drive belts

(First 60 000 miles (96 000 km) or 72 months





NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free butperiodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule dependson fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flowrestriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuelfilter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-essary.

*4 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reducedexcessively.



107

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 monthsafter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) * 4





Maintenance









❑

Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)







❑ Inspect drive belts

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 monthsafter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)* 4









7 11

p g(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)



Maintenance













❑

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads








❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect drive belts

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 monthsafter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)* 4

*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free butperiodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule dependson fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flowrestriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuelfilter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer for details.




127




Maintenance














❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 monthsafter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) * 4


❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)













7 13

Maintenance










❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,








❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank

❑ Inspect valve clearance *3

❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)* 4

❑ R l li t t l i filt (f t d bl it)


*3 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-essary.








147




❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months

after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

Maintenance














❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 monthsafter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)* 4


❑Replace engine oil and filter(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)








7 15

Maintenance









❑

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,








❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)



(Continued)





❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 monthsafter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

No check, No service required

❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)






7

❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 monthsafter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)* 4

(Continued)

16

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chartbelow for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEMMAINTENANCE

OPERATIONMAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I

MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I

FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

REAR BRAKE DISC /PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J

REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

PROPELLER SHAFT I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, E



7 17

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal tem-perature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weatherE - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. If the vehicle isbeing driven in severe conditions, morefrequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-

ration and replace if necessary. Drivebelts should be checked periodically forproper tension and adjusted as neces-sary.

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven, damagethe emission system and cause multipleissues such as hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumu-lates in the fuel tank, the filter mayrequire replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaksat the connections. Fuel filters should be

installed by an authorized HYUNDAIdealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Havean authorized HYUNDAI dealer replaceany damaged or leaking parts immedi-ately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specified

in the maintenance schedule. Make surethat a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap iscorrectly replaced.



187

Maintenance

Vacuum crankcase ventilationhoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that

the hoses do not come in contact withany heat source, sharp edges or movingcomponent which might cause heat dam-age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps and cou-plings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hoses shouldbe replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter isreplaced.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs ofthe correct heat range.

Valve clearance

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if necessary.An authorized HYUNDAI dealer shouldperform the operation.

Cooling system

Check for cooling system components,such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hosesand connections for leakage and dam-age. Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenanceschedule.

Manual transaxle fluid(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluidaccording to the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transaxle fluid(if equipped)Automatic transaxle fluid should not bechecked under normal usage conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid shouldbe changed at an authorized HYUNDAIdealer in accordance to the scheduledmaintenance at the beginning of thischapter.

✽ NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi-cally red.As the vehicle is driven, the automatictransaxle fluid will begin to look darker.It is normal condition and you should



7 19

It is normal condition and you shouldnot judge the need to replace the fluidbased upon the changed color.

Maintenance

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration and anyleakage. Replace any deteriorated ordamaged parts immediately.

Brake/Clutch* fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir. The level should bebetween “MIN” and “MAX” marks on theside of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic

brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT4 specification.

* : if equipped

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system includ-ing the parking brake pedal and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers androtors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluidleakage.

Exhaust pipe and mufflerVisually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,or damage. Start the engine and listencarefully for any exhaust gas leakage.Tighten connections or replace parts asnecessary.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,check for excessive free-play in thesteering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage.Check the dust boots and ball joints fordeterioration, cracks, or damage.Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage.Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-essary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)



207

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reachnormal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil toreturn to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, andre-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and checkthe level.The level should be betweenF and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bringthe level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil frombeing spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)

WARNING - Radiator hoseBe very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it may behot enough to burn you.

OLM079003N OLM079004N

CAUTION• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Engine damage may result.

• Do not spill engine oil, when adding or changing engine oil. If

you drop the engine oil on the engine room, wipe it off immediately.



7 21

Maintenance

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer according tothe Maintenance Schedule at the begin-ning of this section.

The high-pressure cooling system has a

reservoir filled with year-round antifreezecoolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-tory.

Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, at thebeginning of the winter season, andbefore traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

ENGINE COOLANT

WARNINGRemoving radiatorcap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-ator cap while the engine is oper-ating or hot. Doing so might leadto cooling system and engine

damage. Also, hot coolant orsteam could cause serious per-sonal injury.

(Continued)


Engine oil contains chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer, birth defects, andreproductive harm.

Used engine oil may cause irrita-tion or cancer of the skin if left incontact with the skin for prolongedperiods of time. Used engine oil

contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory ani-mals. Always protect your skin bywashing your hands thoroughlywith soap and warm water as soonas possible after handling used oil.



227

Maintenance

Check the condition and connections ofall cooling system hoses and heaterhoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-rated hoses.

The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L marks on the side of thecoolant reservoir when the engine iscool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

specified coolant to provide protectionagainst freezing and corrosion. Bring thelevel to F, but do not overfill. If frequentadditions are required, see an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer for a cooling systeminspection

OLM079006

(Continued)• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme carewhen removing the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it, andturn it counterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back while thepressure is released from thecooling system. When you aresure all the pressure has beenreleased, press down on the cap,

using a thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-ing, do not remove the radiatorcap or the drain plug while theengine and radiator are hot. Hotcoolant and steam may still blowout under pressure, causing seri-ous injury.

WARNINGThe electric motor(cooling fan) is con-trolled by enginecoolant temperature,refrigerant pressure

and vehicle speed. It may some-times operate even when theengine is not running. Use extremecaution when working near theblades of the cooling fan so that

you are not injured by a rotating fanblades. As the engine coolant tem-perature decreases, the electricmotor will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.



7 23

inspection.

Maintenance

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deion-ized water or soft water for your vehicleand never mix hard water in thecoolant filled at the factory. An improp-er coolant mixture can result in seriousmalfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has aluminumengine parts and must be protected byan ethylene-glycol-based coolant to pre-vent corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the specifiedcoolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or less than35% antifreeze, which would reducethe effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-lowing table.

Changing the coolant

Have coolant changed by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the beginningof this section.

WARNINGRadiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant andsteam may blow out under pres-sure causing serious injury.

OLM079007

CAUTIONPut a thick cloth around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such

as the generator.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water



247

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

Maintenance

BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch* fluidlevel

Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-odically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap andadding brake/clutch* fluid, clean the areaaround the reservoir cap thoroughly to

prevent brake/clutch* fluid contamina-tion.

* : if equipped

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level. The level will fall with accumulatedmileage. This is a normal condition asso-ciated with the wear of the brake liningsand/or clutch disc (if equipped). If thefluid level is excessively low, have thebrake/clutch* system checked by anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch* fluid.(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake/clutch*fluid

When changing and addingbrake/clutch* fluid, handle it care-fully. Do not let it come in contactwith your eyes. If brake/clutch* fluidshould come in contact with youreyes, immediately flush them with alarge quantity of fresh tap water.Have your eyes examined by a doc-tor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss ofbrake/clutch* fluid

In the event the brake/clutch* systemrequires frequent additions of fluid,the vehicle should be inspected byan authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OLM079008N

CAUTIONDo not allow brake/clutch* fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It

should be disposed of properly.Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.A few drops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in your brake/clutch* system can damage brake/clutch* system parts



7 25

brake/clutch* system parts.

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level

Check the fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plainwater may be used if washer fluid is notavailable. However, use washer solventwith antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agentscontain some amounts of alcoholand can be flammable under cer-tain circumstances. Do not allowsparks or flame to contact thewasher fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicleor occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-sonous to humans and animals.Do not drink and avoid contactingwindshield washer fluid. Seriousinjury or death could occur.

OLM079010



267

Maintenance

Checking the parking brake

Type A

Check whether the stroke is within spec-ification when the parking brake pedal isdepressed with 44 lb (20 kg, 196 N) offorce. Also, the parking brake aloneshould securely hold the vehicle on a fair-ly steep grade. If the stroke is more orless than specified, have the parking

brake adjusted by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 4 notch

Type B

Check the stroke of the parking brake bycounting the number of “clicks’’ heardwhile fully applying it from the releasedposition. Also, the parking brake aloneshould securely hold the vehicle on a fair-ly steep grade. If the stroke is more orless than specified, have the parkingbrake adjusted by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 6 “clicks’’ at a force of44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

OLM059014 OLM059016

PARKING BRAKE



7 27

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, andshould not be washed.

You can clean the filter when inspectingthe air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed air.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attachingclips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover attachingclips.

Replace the filter according to theMaintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to “Maintenance under severe usage conditions” in this section.)

OLM079012N OLM079013N OLM079014



287

Maintenance

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should bereplaced according to the MaintenanceSchedule. If the vehicle is operated inseverely air-polluted cities or on dustyrough roads for a long period, it shouldbe inspected more frequently andreplaced earlier. When you replace theclimate control air filter, replace it per-forming the following procedure, and becareful to avoid damaging other compo-nents.

Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box and remove thesupport rod (1).

CAUTION• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

OLM079015



7 29

Maintenance

2. With the glove box open, remove thestoppers on both sides.

3. Remove the climate control air filtercase pulling out both sides of thecover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order ofdisassembly.

✽ NOTICEWhen replacing the climate control airfilter install it properly. Otherwise, thesystem may produce noise and the effec-tiveness of the filter may be reduced.

OLM079016 OLM079017 OLM079018



307

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

✽ NOTICECommercial hot waxes applied by auto-matic car washes have been known tomake the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or

the wiper blades with foreign matter canreduce the effectiveness of the wind-shield wipers. Common sources of con-tamination are insects, tree sap, and hotwax treatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-ing properly, clean both the window andthe blades with a good cleaner or milddetergent, and rinse thoroughly withclean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean ade-quately, the blades may be worn orcracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.



7 31

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiperblade assembly to expose the plasticlocking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the bladeassembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in thereverse order of removal.

CAUTIONDo not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

OLM079200 OLM079201 OLM079202



327

Maintenance

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out thewiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly byinserting the center part into the slot inthe wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly isinstalled firmly by trying to pull it slight-ly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms orother components, have an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer replace the wiperblade.

OHM078062 OHM078063



7 33

Maintenance

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention.

If electrolyte gets on yourskin, thoroughly wash thecontacted area. If you feel apain or a burning sensa-tion, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery. Always provideventilation when working inan enclosed space.

An inappropriately dis-posed battery can be harm-ful to the environment andhuman health. Dispose the

battery according to yourlocal law(s) or regulation.

(Continued)

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connectionsclean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from thebattery immediately with a solution ofwater and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used foran extended time, disconnect the bat-tery cables.

BATTERY

OLM079019N

WARNING - Batterydangers

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-bustible gas, is always

present in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of thereach of children becausebatteries contain highlycorrosive SULFURIC ACID.Do not allow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)



347

Maintenance

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in ashort time (because, for example, theheadlights or interior lights were left onwhile the vehicle was not in use),recharge it by slow charging (trickle)for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load while thevehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

(Continued)

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-tery, excessive pressure on thecase may cause battery acid toleak, resulting in personal injury.Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge thebattery when the battery cablesare connected.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. Nevertouch these components with theengine running or the ignitionswitched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-ings can result in serious bodilyinjury or death.

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removedfrom the vehicle and placed in anarea with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-ing, and stop or reduce the charg-ing rate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or ifthe temperature of the electrolyte

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-TION 65 WARNINGBattery posts, terminals, and relat-ed accessories contain lead andlead compounds, chemicals knownto the State of California to causecancer, birth defects, and reproduc-tive harm. Batteries also containother chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer.Washhands after handling.

CAUTIONIf you use unauthorized electronic devices, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.



7 35

the temperature of the electrolyteof any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).

(Continued)

Maintenance

Reset items

Items should be reset after the batteryhas been discharged or the battery hasbeen disconnected.

• Auto up/down window (See section 4)

• Sunroof (See section 4)

• Trip computer (See section 4)

• Climate control system(See section 4)

• Clock (See section 4)

• Audio (See section 4)

(Continued)

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.

1.Turn off the battery charger mainswitch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp fromthe negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp fromthe positive battery terminal.

WARNING• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn offall accessories and stop theengine.

• The negative battery cable mustbe removed first and installed

last when the battery is discon-nected.



367

Maintenance

CAUTION• Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy.Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflationpressures

All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked when thetires are cold. “Cold Tires” means thevehicle has not been driven for atleast three hours or driven less thanone mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, vehiclehandling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,refer to “Tire and wheels” in section8.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the driver’s side centerpillar.

WARNING - Tire underin-flation

Severe underinflation can leadto severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation andother tire failures that can resultin the loss of vehicle controlleading to severe injury ordeath. This risk is much higheron hot days and when driving

OLM089008N



7 37

on hot days and when drivingfor long periods at high speeds.

Maintenance

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month ormore.

Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tirepressure.You can not tell i f your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tire InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, andlead to sudden tire failure. Thiscould result in loss of vehiclecontrol and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than one mile (1.6 km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check

the pressure of other tires.• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

CAUTION• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be under- inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without

the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.



387

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km) orsooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.

When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section

8.

WARNING• Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well aswear and damage. Always usea tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly caus-ing poor handling, loss of vehi-cle control, and sudden tirefailure leading to accidents,

injuries, and even death. Therecommended cold tire pres-sure for your vehicle can befound in this manual and onthe tire label located on the dri-ver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause acci-dents. Replace tires that areworn, show uneven wear, orare damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-sure of your spare tire.HYUNDAI recommends thatyou check the spare everytime you check the pressureof the other tires on your vehi-cle



7 39

cle.

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽ NOTICERotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern only fromfront to rear and not from right toleft.

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)WARNING

• Do not use the compact sparetire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radialply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

CAUTIONImproper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.



407

Maintenance

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread.This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.

Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-

ing the tire.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

WARNING - ReplacingtiresTo reduce the chance or seriousor fatal injuries from an acci-dent caused by tire failure orloss of vehicle control:

• Replace tires that are worn,show uneven wear, or aredamaged. Worn tires cancause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, andtraction.

• Do not drive your vehicle withtoo little or too much pressurein your tires. This can lead touneven wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, nevermix radial and bias-ply tireson the same car. You mustreplace all tires (including the

spare) if moving from radial tobias-ply tires.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Using tires and wheel otherthan the recommended sizescould cause unusual handlingcharacteristics and poor vehi-cle control, resulting in a seri-ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meetHYUNDAI’s specifications mayfit poorly and result in damageto the vehicle or unusual han-dling and poor vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparingthe speed of the wheels. Tiresize can affect wheel speed.When replacing tires, all 4tires must use the same sizeoriginally supplied with thevehicle. Using tires of a differ-ent size can cause the ABS(Anti-lock Brake System) andESC (Electronic StabilityControl) to work irregularly (ifequipped).



7 41

Maintenance

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew vehicle and should be mountedon the same compact spare tirewheel. The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. Slow down whenever thereis rain, snow or ice on the road toreduce the possibility of losing con-trol of the vehicle.

Tire maintenanceIn addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handlingcharacteristics, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance,snow chain clearance,speedometer and odometer cal-ibration, headlight aim andbumper height.



427

Maintenance

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies anddescribes the fundamental charac-teristics of the tire and also providesthe tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. TheTIN can be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or Brand name isshown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tire size designationmean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)

225/55R18 105T

225 - Tire width in millimeters.

55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

18 - Rim diameter in inches.105 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this section

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.5JX18

6.5 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

18 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7



7 43

p gfor additional information.

Maintenance

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger car tires. Thespeed rating is part of the tire sizedesignation on the sidewall of thetire. This symbol corresponds to thattire's designed maximum safe oper-ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

Identification Number) Any tires that are over 6 years old,based on the manufacturing date,(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.

For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1611 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2011.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and thel tt "B" b lt d bi l

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

WARNING - Tire ageTires degrade over time, evenwhen they are not being used.

Regardless of the remainingtread, it is recommended thattires generally be replaced aftersix (6) years of normal service.Heat caused by hot climates orfrequent high loading condi-tions can accelerate the aging

process. Failure to follow thiswarning can result in suddentire failure, which could lead toa loss of control and an acci-dent involving serious injury ordeath.



447

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

Maintenance

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maxi-mum section width.

For example:

TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the gov-ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

The tires available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehiclemay vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.

WARNINGThe traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include accelera-tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.



7 45

These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

Maintenance

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel.

Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the labora-tory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transaxle,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

WARNING - TiretemperatureThe temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentire failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.



467

Maintenance

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of

air pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascals (kPa) before a tire has builtup heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded intothe sidewall of a tire signifying thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motorvehicle safety standards. The DOTcode includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The

side of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.

Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The

maximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 150pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designated

seating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to the

beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead



7 47

between the tread and the bead.

Maintenance

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric

code assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wear

bars," that show across the tread of atire when only 2/32 inch of treadremains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire: Load on an individual tire due tocurb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and dividing by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tireson some models to provide goodperformance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

HYUNDAI specifies summer tires onsome models to provide superiorperformance on dry roads. Summertire performance is substantiallyreduced in snow and ice. Summertires do not have the tire traction rat-ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tireside wall. if you plan to operate yourvehicle in snowy or icy conditions.HYUNDAI recommends the use ofsnow tires or all season tires on allfour wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28kPa) more air pressure than thepressure recommended for the stan-dard tires on the tire label on the dri-ver's side of the center pillar, or up tothe maximum pressure shown on thetire sidewall, whichever is less.



487

tire sidewall, whichever is less.

Maintenance

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120

km/h) when your vehicle is equippedwith snow tires.

Tire chains

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the drive wheels as fol-lows.

2WD : Front wheels

AWD : All four wheels

If a full set of chains is notavailable for a AWD vehicle,chains may be installed onthe front wheels only.

Be sure that the chains are installedin accordance with the manufactur-er's instructions.

To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains whenthey are no longer needed.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improvedtread life, road hazard resistance andsmoother high speed ride. The radi-al-ply tires used on this vehicle are ofbelted construction, and are selectedto complement the ride and handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle.Radial-ply tires have the same loadcarrying capacity, as bias-ply or biasbelted tires of the same size, and usethe same recommended inflationpressure. Mixing of radial-ply tireswith bias-ply or bias belted tires isnot recommended. Any combina-tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or biasbelted tires when used on the samevehicle will seriously deterioratevehicle handling.The best rule to fol-low is: Identical radial-ply tires shouldalways be used as a set of four.

Longer wearing tires can be more

susceptible to irregular tread wear. Itis very important to follow the tirerotation interval shown in this sectionto achieve the tread life potential ofthese tires. Cuts and punctures inradial-ply tires are repairable only inthe tread area, because of sidewallfl i C lt ti d l f

WARNING - Snow or ice• When driving on roads cov-ered with snow or ice, drive atless than 20 mph (30 km/h).

• Use the SAE “S” class or wirechains.

• If you hear noise caused bychains contacting the body,retighten the chain to avoidcontact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,retighten the chains after driv-ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains onvehicles equipped with alu-minum wheels. In unavoid-able circumstance, use a wiretype chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.59inches (15 mm) to preventdamage to the chain’s con-nection.



7 49

flexing. Consult your tire dealer forradial-ply tire repairs.

Maintenance

FUSES

A vehicle’s electrical system is protectedfrom electrical overload damage byfuses.

This vehicle has 3 fuse panels, one locat-ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, theother in the engine compartment.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, check theappropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse hasblown, the element inside the fuse willmelt.

If the electrical system does not work,

first check the driver’s side fuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse with one ofthe same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-cates an electrical problem. Avoid usingthe system involved and immediatelyconsult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Four kinds of fuse are used: blade type,cartridge type, multi fuse and main fuse.

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment• Never replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly afire.

• Never install a wire or aluminumfoil instead of the proper fuse -even as a temporary repair. It may

cause extensive wiring damageand a possible fire.

CAUTIONDo not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

OLM079051N

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Multi fuse

Main fuse

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

Normal Blown



507

OLM079051N

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse replace-ment

1. Turn the ignition switch and all otherswitches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.Use the removal tool provided in thefuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the instrument panel fuse panel (or in the engine compartment fuse panel).

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-ponents do not work and the fuses areOK, check the fuse panel in the enginecompartment. If a fuse is blown, it mustbe replaced.

OLM079020 OLM079021N



7 51

Maintenance

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memoryfuse to prevent battery discharge if yourvehicle is parked without being operatedfor prolonged periods. Use the followingprocedures before parking the vehicle forprolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the memory fuse.

✽ NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up fromthe fuse panel, the warning chime,audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,will not operate. Some items must bereset after replacement. Refer to“Battery” in this section.

• Even when the memory fuse is pulledup, the battery can still be dischargedby operation of the headlights orotherelectrical devices.

Engine compartment fusereplacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all otherswitches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover bypressing the tab and pulling the coverup.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown. To remove or insert the fuse,use the fuse puller in the engine com-

partment fuse panel.4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

OLM079023NOLM079022



527

Maintenance

Main fuse and Multi fuse

If the main fuse and Multi fuse is blown,it must be removed as follows:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the nuts shown in the pictureabove.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of thesame rating.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order ofremoval.

✽ NOTICE

If the main fuse is blown, consult anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTIONAfter checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover. If not,electrical failures may occur from water contact.

OLM079052N



7 53

Maintenance

✽ NOTICENot all fuse panel descriptions in thismanual may be applicable to your vehi-cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.When you inspect the fuse panel in yourvehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Instrument panel fuse panel Engine compartment fuse panel

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.



547

OLM079026/OLM079027N/OLM079053N

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

AUDIO 1 10A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Module

ROOM LP(MEMORY FUSE)

10ABCM, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Room Lamp, Driver/Passenger Vanity Lamp Switch,Date Link Connector, Door warning Switch, RF Receiver, A/C Control Module, Luggage Lamp,

IPS Control Module, Instrument Cluster (IND.), Map Lamp, Electro Chromic Mirror

MODULE 2 10A IPS Control Module, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror, PDM

START 10A Burglar Alarm Relay, E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Start Relay)

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)

CLUSTER 10A Audio, Console Switch, Instrument Cluster(IND.), BCM, Alternator, A/V & Navigation Head Module

MODULE 4 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Blower Relay), Cluster Ionizer, A/C Control Module, Sunroof Motor

POWER OUTLET 2 25A Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet, Rear Power Outlet

AUDIO 2 10A Power Outside Mirror Switch, AMP, BCM, PDM, A/V & Navigation Head Module, Audio

A/BAG 10A SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor

MODULE 1 10AIPS Control Module, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, EPS Control Module, Steering Angle Sensor,ESC OFF Switch, DBC Switch, ICM Relay Box(DBC Relay), Multifunction Switch(Light),

Stop Lamp Switch, AWD ECM

FOG LP RR 10A -

WIPER FRT 25A Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch(Wiper), E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Front Wiper Relay)S/HEATER FRT 15A Console Switch

POWER OUTLET 1 15A Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet



7 55

Maintenance


B/UP LP 10A B/UP LP RelayDR LOCK 15A Door Lock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, Door Unlock Relay

MODULE 5 7.5A BCM, PDM

WIPER RR 15A ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)

SUNROOF 15A Sunroof Motor

IGN 1 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(ECU 2 7.5A, ABS 7.5A, TCU 2 7.5A)

A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module

S/HEATER RR 15A -

P/WDW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH

MODULE 3 10A -

P/SEAT (DRV) 20A Driver Seat Manual Switch

PDM 15A PDM

P/WDW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH

AMP 25A AMP

HTD MIRR 7.5A Rear Defogger Switch, Rear Defogger (+), Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror

SAFETY POWER WINDOW 20A Driver Safety Power Window Module

TPMS 7.5A ATM Shift Lever, AWD ECM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module

HAZARD 15A ICM Relay Box(Flasher Sound Relay), BCM



567

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel


MULTIFUSE

MDPS 80A EPS Control Module

B+1 60A I/P Junction Box(PDM 15A, DR LOCK 15A, HAZARD 15A, IPS 4, IPS 5, IPS 6, IPS 7)

ABS 2 40A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module

EMS 40A EMS Box(TCU 1 15A, ECU 30A, A/CON 10A, F/PUMP 15A)

ABS 1 40A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

B+3 60AI/P Junction Box(P/SEAT(DRV) 20A, SAFETY POWER WINDOW 20A, TPMS 7.5A,Power Connector(AUDIO 1 10A, ROOM LP 10A))

B+2 60A I/P Junction Box(Power Window Relay, SUNROOF 15A, AMP 25A, IPS 0, IPS 1, IPS 2, IPS 3)

FUSE

C/FAN 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(C/FAN LO Relay, C/FAN HI Relay)

RR HTD 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(RR HTD Relay)

IGN 1 40A PDM Relay Box(IGN1 Relay), Ignition Switch

IGN 2 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Statr Relay), PDM Relay Box(IGN2 Relay), Ignition Switch

HORN 15A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Horn Relay, B/A Horn Relay)

DEICER 15A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Deicer Relay, RR HTD Relay)

STOP LP 10A Stop Lamp Switch, ICM Relay Box(DBC Relay)

B+ SENSOR 10A Batter Sensor

TCU 2 7.5A Transaxle Range Switch(A/T), Vehicle Speed Sensor(M/T)

ABS 7.5A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module

ECU 2 7.5A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(ATM P/N Relay), Mass Air Flow Sensor, PCM

F/PUMP 15A EMS Box(F/PUMP Relay)



7 57

Maintenance


FUSE

SENSOR 4 15A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(C/FAN HI, LO Relay), EMS Box(F/PUMP Relay),Oxygen Sensor (UP, DOWN), PCM

SENSOR 3 10A EMS Box(A/CON Relay), Injector(#1, #2, #3, #4)

SENSOR 2 10A -

TCU 1 15A PCM

A/CON 10A EMS Box(A/CON Relay)

SENSOR 1 10ACrankshaft Position Sensor, Camshaft Position Sensor #1/2, Oil Control Valve #1/2,

Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Manifold Valve, Canister Close Valve

ECU 1 20A Ignition Colil (#1, #2, #3, #4), Condenser

ECU 30A EMS Box(Engine Control Relay)



587

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Use only the bulbs of the specified

wattage.

✽ NOTICEAfter heavy, driving rain or washing,headlight and taillight lenses couldappear frosty. This condition is caused bythe temperature difference between thelamp inside and outside. This is similar

to the condensation on your windowsinside your vehicle during the rain anddoesn’t indicate a problem with yourvehicle. If the water leaks into the lampbulb circuitry, have the vehicle checkedby an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Headlight, position light, turn sig-nal light, side marker light andfront fog light bulb replacement

(1) Front turn signal light

(2) Position light

(3) Headlight (High/Low)

(4) Front side marker light

(5) Front fog light (if equipped)

WARNING - Working onthe lights

Prior to working on the light, firmlyapply the parking brake, ensurethat the ignition switch is turned tothe LOCK position and turn off thelights to avoid sudden movementof the vehicle and burning your fin-gers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTIONBe sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.

CAUTIONIf you don’t have necessary tools,the correct bulbs and the expertise,consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlight assembly to get to the bulb(s).Removing/installing the headlight

assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

OLM079029



7 59

Maintenance

Headlight bulb 1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the headlight bulb cover byturning it counterclockwise.

3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retainingwire by depressing the end and push-ing it upward.

(Continued)

• A bulb should be operated onlywhen installed in a headlight.

• If a bulb becomes damaged orcracked, replace it immediatelyand carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cooldown before handling it.

OHD076046

WARNING - Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-ized gas that will produce flyingpieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,and avoid scratches and abra-sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid

contact with liquids.• Never touch the glass with barehands. Residual oil may causethe bulb to overheat and burstwhen lit.

(Continued)

OLM079030



607

Maintenance

5. Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly.

6. Install a new headlight bulb and snapthe headlight bulb retaining wire intoposition by aligning the wire with thegroove on the bulb.

7. Connect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-ing it clockwise.

Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)

If the light bulb is not operating, have thevehicle checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Turn signal light/Position light

1. Remove the socket from the assemblyby turning the socket counterclockwiseuntil the tabs on the socket align withthe slots on the assembly.

2. Remove the bulb from the socket bypressing it in and rotating it counter-clockwise until the tabs on the bulbalign with the slots in the socket. Pullthe bulb out of the socket

3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it intothe socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.4. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with theslots in the assembly. Push the socketinto the assembly and turn the socketclockwise.

OLM079046



7 61

Maintenance

Side repeater light replacement

If the light bulb does not operate, havethe vehicle checked by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

Rear combination light bulbreplacement

(1) Stop and tail light

(2) Rear turn signal light

(3) Back-up light

(4) Tail light

(5) Rear side marker light

Outside light

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Loosen the light assembly retainingscrews with a philips head screwdriver.

3. Remove the rear combination lightassembly from the body of the vehicle.

OLM079031 OLM079033

OLM079034

OLM079035



627

Maintenance


5. Remove the bulb from the socket bypressing it in and rotating it counter-clockwise until the tabs on the bulbalign with the slots in the socket. Pullthe bulb out of the socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it intothe socket and rotating it until it locksinto place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly byaligning the tabs on the socket with theslots in the assembly. Push the socketinto the assembly and turn the socketclockwise.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to thebody of the vehicle.

Inside light

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the service cover using a flat-blade screwdriver.


4. Remove the bulb from the socket bypressing it in and rotating it counter-clockwise until the tabs on the bulbalign with the slots in the socket. Pullthe bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it intothe socket and rotating it until it locksinto place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly byaligning the tabs on the socket with theslots in the assembly. Push the socketinto the assembly and turn the socketclockwise.

7. Install the service cover by putting itinto the service hole.

OLM079036 OLM079047 OLM079038



7 63

y

Maintenance

High mounted stop lightreplacement

1.Open the tailgate.

2.Gently remove the center cover of therear tailgate trim.

3.Disconnect the electrical connector.

4.Loosen the retaining nuts and removethe spoiler.

5.Remove the high mounted stop lightassembly (A) after loosening the nutsand washer nozzle (B).

6.Reinstall a new light assembly in thereverse order of removal.

License plate light bulb replace-ment

1. Remove the lens by pressing the tabs.

2. Remove the socket from the lens.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straightout.

4. Install a new bulb in the socket andinstall the socket to the lens.

5. Reinstall the lens securely.

OLM071061L

(A)

(B)

OLM071060L

OLM079039

OLM079055



647



Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

WARNING - Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warning andcaution statements that appear on thelabel.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish fromrust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly

and frequently at least once a month withlukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-ing, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to theremoval of any accumulation of salt, dirt,mud, and other foreign materials. Makesure the drain holes in the lower edges ofthe doors and rocker panels are keptclear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar depositscan damage your vehicle’s finish if notremoved immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain watermay not completely remove all these

deposits. A mild soap, safe for use onpainted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Donot allow soap to dry on the finish.

CAUTION• Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure water. Water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.



667

Maintenance

Waxing

A good coat of wax is a barrier between

your paint and contaminate. Keeping agood coat of wax on your vehicle will helpprotect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing. Use a good quality liquid orpaste wax, and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions. Wax all metal trim to protectit and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materialswith a spot remover will usually strip thewax from the finish. Be sure to re-waxthese areas even if the rest of the vehicledoes not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quickly rustand may develop into a major repairexpense.

✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged and requiresany metal repair or replacement, be surethe body shop applies anti-corrosionmaterials to the parts repaired orreplaced.

CAUTION• Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside

the vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts.This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

OJB037800



7 67

Maintenance

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or othersharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metalparts from corrosion, apply a coating ofwax or chrome preservative and rub toa high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal parts witha heavier coating of wax or preserva-tive. If necessary, coat the parts withnon-corrosive petroleum jelly or other

protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may col-lect on the underbody. If these materialsare not removed, accelerated rusting canoccur on underbody parts such as thefuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaustsystem, even though they have beentreated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbodyand wheel openings with lukewarm orcold water once a month, after off-roaddriving and at the end of each winter. Pay

special attention to these areas becauseit is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. Itwill do more harm than good to wet downthe road grime without removing it. Thelower edges of doors, rocker panels, andframe members have drain holes thatshould not be allowed to clog with dirt;trapped water in these areas can causerusting.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a

clear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wirebrushes on aluminum wheels. Theymay scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.Also, be sure to clean the wheels afterdriving on salted roads. This helps pre-vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners containingacid or acid detergents. It may damageand corrode the aluminum wheelscoated with a clear protective finish.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.



687

Maintenance

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, we produces cars of the highestquality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosionresistance your vehicle can deliver, theowner's cooperation and assistance isalso required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosionon your car are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that isallowed to accumulate underneath thevehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective coatingsby stones, gravel, abrasion or minorscrapes and dents which leave unpro-tected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle

is regularly exposed to corrosive materi-als, corrosion protection is particularlyimportant. Some of the common causesof accelerated corrosion are road salts,dust control chemicals, ocean air andindustrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which

corrosion is most likely to occur. Forexample, corrosion is accelerated byhigh humidity, particularly when tempera-tures are just above freezing. In suchconditions, the corrosive material is keptin contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it isslow to dry and holds moisture in contactwith the vehicle. Although the mudappears to be dry, it can still retain the

moisture and promote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dis-persed. For all these reasons, it is par-ticularly important to keep your vehicleclean and free of mud or accumulationsof other materials. This applies not onlyto the visible surfaces but particularly tothe underside of the vehicle.



7 69

Maintenance

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get-

ting started by observing the following:

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your vehicle clean and free of cor-rosive materials. Attention to the under-side of the vehicle is particularly impor-tant.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —

where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.—, you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your vehicleat least once a month and be sure toclean the underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle,give particular attention to the compo-

nents under the fenders and otherareas that are hidden from view. Do athorough job; just dampening the accu-mulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion ratherthan prevent it. Water under high pres-sure and steam are particularly effec-tive in removing accumulated mud andcorrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, be

sure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not betrapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your vehiclein the garage or drive it into the garagewhen it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage cancontribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be

covered with "touch-up" paint as soon aspossible to reduce the possibility of cor-rosion. If bare metal is showing through,the attention of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-ly corrosive and may damage paintedsurfaces in just a few hours. Alwaysremove bird droppings as soon as possi-ble.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor matsand carpeting to cause corrosion. Checkunder the mats periodically to be surethe carpeting is dry. Use particular care ifyou carry fertilizers, cleaning materials orchemicals in the vehicle.

These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaks should

be cleaned up, flushed with clean waterand thoroughly dried.



707

Maintenance

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as per-fume and cosmetic oil from contactingthe dashboard because they may causedamage or discoloration. If they do con-tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-diately. See the instructions for the prop-er way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

VinylRemove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean with a mild soap solution recom-mended for upholstery or carpets.Remove fresh spots immediately with afabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do notreceive immediate attention, the fabriccan be stained and its color can beaffected.Also, its fire-resistant propertiescan be reduced if the material is notproperly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-tions provided with the soap. Do notbleach or re-dye the webbing becausethis may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-cle become fogged (that is, covered withan oily, greasy or waxy film), they should

be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow thedirections on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTIONNever allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTIONUsing anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire- resistant properties.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window.This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high

alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.



7 71

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty infor-mation contained in the Owner’sHandbook & Warranty Information book-let in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all applicableemission regulations.

There are three emission control sys-tems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function ofthe emission control systems, it is rec-ommended that you have your vehicleinspected and maintained by an author-ized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in this manu-al.

Caution for the Inspection andMaintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,turn the Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system off by pressing theESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-pleted, turn the ESC system back onby pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission controlsystem

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-tem is employed to prevent air pollutioncaused by blow-by gases being emittedfrom the crankcase.This system suppliesfresh filtered air to the crankcase throughthe air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,which then pass through the PCV valveinto the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control(including ORVR: OnboardRefueling Vapor Recovery)system

The Evaporative Emission ControlSystem is designed to prevent fuelvapors from escaping into the atmos-phere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to beloaded into a canister while refueling at

the gas station, preventing the escape offuel vapors into the atmosphere.)



727

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine isrunning, the fuel vapors absorbed in thecanister are drawn into the surge tankthrough the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-trolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-

es so that evaporated fuel is not takeninto the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel to theengine.

3. Exhaust emission controlsystem

The Exhaust Emission Control System isa highly effective system which controlsexhaust emissions while maintaininggood vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affectits performance, safety or durability andmay even violate governmental safetyand emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modificationmay not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronicdevices, it may cause the vehicle tooperate abnormally, wire damage, bat-tery discharge and fire. For your safety,

be careful not to damage.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present withother exhaust fumes. Therefore, if yousmell exhaust fumes of any kind insideyour vehicle, have it inspected andrepaired immediately. If you ever sus-pect exhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with all thewindows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain car-bon monoxide (CO). Though color-less and odorless, it is dangerousand could be lethal if inhaled.Follow the instructions on thispage to avoid CO poisoning.


Engine exhaust and a wide varietyof automobile components andparts, including components foundin the interior furnishings in a vehi-cle, contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects andreproductive harm. In addition, cer-tain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of componentwear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm.



7 73

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confinedor closed areas (such as garages) any

more than what is necessary to movethe vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a short timewith the engine running, adjust theventilation system (as needed) to drawoutside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-cle for any extended time with theengine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,

excessive attempts to restart theengine may cause damage to theemission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-line engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when thereare signs of engine malfunction, suchas misfire or a noticeable loss of per-formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.Examples of misuse are coasting withthe ignition off and descending steep

grades in gear with the ignition off.• Do not operate the engine at high idle

speed for extended periods (5 minutesor more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any partof the engine or emission control sys-tem. All inspections and adjustmentsmust be made by an authorizedHYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thecatalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyticconverter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could void yourwarranties.

WARNING - Fire• A hot exhaust system can ignite

flammable items under your vehi-cle. Do not park, idle, or drive thevehicle over or near flammableobjects, such as grass, vegeta-tion, paper, leaves, etc.

• The exhaust system and catalyticsystem are very hot while theengine is running or immediatelyafter the engine is turned off. Keepaway from the exhaust systemand catalytic, you may get burned.

Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, donot seal the bottom of the vehicleor do not coat the vehicle for cor-rosion control. It may present afire risk under certain conditions.



747

7 75

Maintenance

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Perchlorate Material-special handlingmay apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-

ardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such asair bag inflators, seatbelt pretensionersand keyless remote entry batteries, mustbe disposed of according to Title 22California Code of Regulations Section67384.10 (a).



7 75

8

Dimensions / 8-2

Bulb wattage / 8-2

Tires and wheels / 8-3Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6

Vehicle certification label / 8-6

Tire specification and pressure label / 8-7

Engine number / 8-7

Consumer information / 8-8

Reporting safety defects / 8-9

Binding arbitration / 8-9

Specifications, Consumer information,Reporting safety defects



Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

28

Item in (mm)

Overall length 173.2 (4400)

Overall width 71.7 (1820)

Overall height 65.2 (1655) / 66.3 (1685)*1

Front tread 62.4 (1585)

Rear tread 62.44 (1586)

Wheelbase 103.9 (2640)

DIMENSIONS

Light Bulb Wattage

Headlights (High/Low) 60/55

Front turn signal lights 28/8

Position lights 5

Side repeater lights LED

Front side marker lights 5

Front fog lights* 27

Stop and tail lights 28/8

Rear turn signal lights 27

Back-up lights 16

Rear side marker lights* 5High mounted stop light LED

License plate lights 5

Map lamps 10

Room lamps 10

Luggage lamp* 5

Glove box lamp 5

Vanity mirror lamps 5

BULB WATTAGE

* : if equipped

*1 : with roof rack



28

8 3


TIRES AND WHEELS

Front Rear

225/60R17 6.5J×17 230 230

225/55R18 6.5J×18 (33) (33)

420 420T155/90D16 4.0T×16

(60) (60)

Full size tire

Compact spare tire

Wheel lug nut torque

lbft (kgf•m, N•m)

65~79

(9~11 , 88~107)

ItemTire

size Wheel size

Inflation pressure

kPa (psi)

✽ NOTICEIt is permissible to add 3psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon. Tires typicallyloose 1psi for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, re-check your tire pressure as nec-essary to keep them properly inflated.



8 3


48

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correctlubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducingthe amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’stime, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill)

Recommends2.0 Engine 4.33 US qt. (4.1 l)

API Service SM*3,

ILSAC GF-4 or above2.4 Engine 4.86 US qt. (4.6 l)

Manual transaxle fluid

2.0 Engine2.22~2.32 US qt.

(2.1~2.2 l)API GL-4, SAE 75W/85

2.4 Engine 1.90~2.01 US qt.(1.8~1.9 l)

Automatic transaxle fluid 7.50 US qt. (7.1 l )

MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IVNOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV or other

brands meeting the above specification approved byHyundai Motor Co.,

Coolant 7.19 US qt. (6.8 l)Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base

coolant for aluminum radiator)

Brake/clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Rear axle oil (AWD) 0.69 US qt. (0.65 l)Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE 75W/90(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)Transfer case oil (AWD) 0.63 US qt. (0.6 l)

Fuel 15.3 US gal. (58 l) -



48

8 5


Recommended SAE viscositynumber

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has aneffect on fuel economy and cold weather

operating (engine start and engine oilflowability). Lower viscosity engine oilscan provide better fuel economy and coldweather performance, however, higherviscosity engine oils are required for sat-isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Usingoils of any viscosity other than those rec-ommended could result in engine dam-age.

When choosing an oil, consider the rangeof temperature your vehicle will be oper-

ated in before the next oil change.Proceed to select the recommended oilviscosity from the chart.CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

GasolineEngine Oil *1

°C(°F) -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

*1 For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of

a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, ifthe engine oil is not available in your country, select the properengine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.



8 5


68

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isthe number used in registering your carand in all legal matters pertaining to itsownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floorunder the passenger seat. To check thenumber, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached to thetop of the dashboard.The number on theplate can easily be seen through thewindshield from outside.

The vehicle certification label attachedon the driver’s side center pillar gives thevehicle identification number (VIN).

OLM089002N

VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

OLM089006NOLM089001

Frame number VIN label



68

8 7


The tires supplied on your new vehicleare chosen to provide the best perform-ance for normal driving.The tire label located on the driver's sidecenter pillar gives the tire pressures rec-ommended for your car.

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

OLM089008NOLM089003

ENGINE NUMBERTIRE SPECIFICATION ANDPRESSURE LABEL




88

This consumer information has been pre-pared in accordance with regulationsissued by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration of the U.S.Department of Transportation. YourHyundai dealer will help answer anyquestions you may have as you read thisinformation.

Hyundai motor vehicles are designedand manufactured to meet or exceed allapplicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we stronglyurge you to read and follow all directionsin this Owner's Manual, particularly theinformation under the headings"NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you haveany questions regarding the operation ofyour vehicle, please contact your nearestHyundai Motor America Regional Office

as listed in the following:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island, Vermont.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,Maryland, North Carolina, SouthCarolina, Virginia, West Virginia.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama,Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, NewMexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota,Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,Arizona, California, Colorado, ldaho,Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,Washington, Wyoming.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850

(800) 633-5151

CONSUMER INFORMATION



8 9


If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA. If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, orHYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New JerseyAve SE West Building Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain other informa-tion about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Any claim or dispute you may have relat-ed to your vehicle's warranty or the dutiescontemplated under the warranty, includ-ing claims related to the refund or partialrefund of your vehicle's purchase price(excluding personal injury or product lia-bility claims), shall be resolved by bindingarbitration. Binding arbitration shall beadministered by and through theAmerican Arbitration Association (AAA).You will not be responsible for paying fil-ing and hearing fees above $275.00. Allother arbitration costs shall be borne byHyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right to a jury trial.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpreted underthe Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. sec-tions 1-16. Judgment upon any awardmay be entered in any court having juris-diction.You may revoke this ArbitrationAgreement by (1) written notice or (2)electronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Affairs,10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box 20849,Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.

Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address: http://war-ranty-arbitrat ion.hyundaiUSA.com.Notice must be received within 90 daysafter you purchase your vehicle.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS BINDING ARBITRATION (U.S.A ONLY)

Manual 2012 Tucson

Documents

Transcript of Manual 2012 Tucson